fardse
Py :
nah ne
an : it i NALtH 4 . iekd SARL f ty + ; ipl thiines Hh
ae | aes Kitasato ah z is nena
te pena fit Hine itt lhe Niancmanesiine minbeen nid ie se ‘
wea Hua cea aoa nebo iat Maer yh mae
a i :
sey HN Wy Mis! i Bit ty tpnbals ahi
pI pate See as ianirnnennatie
eh MS os y ce f sone ‘ tet Hi hr He ees
‘ nh 2
¥ {y!
ried anaes bh ae
Ue bn tat a 1 net
aire
i ea 2
a a
Se wd'e
pea ft Bilin La bi4na i PH Alario hiee te
ae } ttt Sha Miler Hat te
Hr
3 ye sueey i * i AVrdenete
yee
fe
; vais: 94 4
hited
seute ; : } ay
dab ape teyy RT aagodab any i t "y hr mpi
be i itt 9 are aad Wy
it ‘Saale PPE eI ey ett 7 ibid Hl) (anu a
4 nit Ja ands ANA Beate a crear ah fu nit ath
hi) aed) i y Molsun Sasi thi
ments nig fi te
Ph ica Magy viet ioey
Hislae a th
seg Basti!
Re hin:
Tdsa"
os shit
oe us vs
¢ At ne
i cee ae
mt Hi
yet p x i i: i
#
ait i ieett
a
asked a f
: di papal Hate f
DHL +H al v Spd MH sia sie
-
i ee oy fn in ie
4 HA ocd i i) it ok He 4; Hye: a if ee
eit ti Gt mae ut Hud ib
iy rene pisos ie
: Hy
lt tounge
i ilar Wee ced ty
Pty ine
nauk i)
i ve
eat ay ti i
NPT OER TE a fis
stated tata 4 Piatt
nt Hy ius Hi ie isiaer
Pdistanpr erin dt wera cre dat
yey Ns ve oh i Waseflaisiet unas tite
toh
4) LAG
ee ee : pe
nea et tia
ie Hy
i Te
Guere
ae:
RIO A GO Fey yhiss
ef} ty ty ave ear ‘ Mi} EN LU eae
: f at ined © VOR Cp ents,
wih meets! intas it) ri 4 pose) ;
Deacons his earmRroseeme Maas
ai Retna
Gea rien Ray iH ib
milks
Au tig iy 7 tis ay.
ry ae inetd
7 eens
ee tite . ite ae fui! ts
r ye i) HY
‘pve
“te He
BRAK my ra aerial ley
ea oe
‘ : Y hi var lense BE AHA ne
A re vi inte He Ne enO in Vogt aa "
j Bilt OD De aes eet ‘sth StH a
wh
tats a ican 4 eit gf esse)
4 4 Pt SFE
yaw
*
<
eR eee Natta 2)
Cee
PROCEEDINGS
OW Uns
ROYAL SOCIETY
s2i@\se al Sse
VO. AAV I
it
Edited by =
A. B. WALKOM, B.Sc
The Authors of Papers are alone responsible for the
statements made
and the opinions expressed theretn.
PRINTED FOR THE SOCIETY
BY
POLE & CO, PRINTERS, ELIZABETH STREET, BRISBANE
1914
| |) ed
HY a TAT 1D}
Muah Wai wah
Volt Th AG
_—T
mu
—
Uiedh
Royal Society of Queensland
ay a e Drs
C¢é ANA RS Pt oArck /3
Patron :
HIS -EXCELLENCY SIR WILLIAM MacGREGOR,
M.D:, G:CMG., CB: Ere:
OFFICERS, J914.
President:
J. SHIRLEY, D.Sc.
| “1Ce- Pre side nt:
2 HARVEY JOHNSTON, M.A: D:Se:-
Hon. Treasurer : Hon. Secretary :
J. C. BRUNNICH, F.1.C. F. BENNETT.
Hon. Librarian : Asst. Hon. Librarian:
Fr HARVEY JOHNSTON, M.A... D.Sc. C. D. GILLIES, B.Sc.
Hon. Editor:
A. B. WALKOM, B:Sc.
Members of Cou nel:
®. H. GURNEY. H. C. RICHARDS, M.Sc.
H: J. PRIESTEBY, M:A: A. B. WALKOM, B.Sc.
P. L. WESTON, B.Ss., BE.
Trustees :
JOHN CAMERON. HON. A. J. THYNNE, M_L-C.
Ko be ROK. MEA:
Hon. Auditor:
GEO. WATKINS.
-
'
+00
i
7
> oul 7
ch
i
‘
aS
he
Po all
‘ 7
>
B 7
®
Ls rm
y 5 Pee
; ;
i
® A i
v3
d
a
>
* Ld
. U al
’
J
'
as
‘ \ ¢
a
4 : q
A nd
¥
© 2
a -
]
Pee, | - ¢
Md Bree : “ A
anal all <
58 - ‘
p> 4 : “4
“¢ ‘
.
i i
» =
) ~
a ~
* ‘
sipceaee |
; JAG hd L
: TART AU WARliaith 1" i
SRYAGEATW TANGEAY
ire tinisst:( chu eee
CONTENTS.
VOLUME. AXVE.
PrestpentiAL Appress: The Development of Pet
rology during the present century, by /enry
C. Richards, M.Sc, Lecturer in Geology, The
University of Queensland.
THe COMPOSITION OF THE OIL OF PRICKLY-PEAR SEED
(Opuntia spp.), by Frank Smith, BSc., F.I.C.,
and LL. A. Meston.
SOME OIL-BEARING SEEDS .NDIGENOUS TO QUEENSLAND.
I. The seed of Macadamia ternifolia and its oil.
by Frank Smith, B.Sc., F.I.C.,and L.A. Meston.
Notes oN A Piant-BEaRING Common Buack OPAL,
FROM TWEED Heaps, N.S.W.. by Ernest W. Skeats.
D.Sc., A.R.CS., F.GS., Professor of Geology and
Mineralogy, The University of Melbourne. (With
plates I. and II.)
RADIOGENESIS IN Evouurion, by H. A. Longman,
Queensland Museum.
Cacta& oR Prickty Prars, by John Shirley, D.Sc.,
and C. A. Lambert (with plates III.—VII.)
Nores ON THE MARINE MOLLUSCA OF QUEENSLAND,
Part ITI., by John Shirley, D.Sc., F.MS.
SOME OTL-BEARING SEEDS INDIGENOUS TO QUEENSLAND.
Il. The oil ef Callophyllum inophyllum (Domba
Nut). LI. The oil of the seed of Hernandia bivalvis
(Grease Nut.) IV. Note on Queensland Candle-
Nut Oil, by Frank Smith, B.Sc., F.I.C.
A Nove ON THE PRECAVAL SystTEM OF Hyla ce@rulea,
White, by C. D. Gillies, B.Sc., Biological, Labor-
atory, the University of Queensland (with plate
VII.)
D6
Vi. CONTENTS.
AppITIONS TO THE ROTIFERA OF QUEENSLAND, by W.
R. Colledge. Ee =f =# 3 ce
Some NEW QUEENSLAND ENvoparasitEs, by 7. [Harvey
Johnston, M.A.. D.Sc. (with plates LX. and X.)
Tue FreezinG Point oF some ABNORMAL MILKs, by
J. B. Henderson. F.1I.C.. and L. A. Meston. ..
FurTHER New GENERA AND SPECIES OF AUSTRALIAN
ProcToTRYPOoIDEA. by Alan P. Dodd. =
({EOLOGY AND PETROLOGY OF THE ENOGGERA GRANITE
AND THE ALLIED IntTRUSIVES, Part lL. by W H.
Bryan. B.Sc. (with plates XI. and XII)...
NotTeS AND EXHIBITS. ee oz cae cue
TItLE PaGr Ss ms ot Le sh Es
Q)FFICERS FOR 1914 ve ae aie sam am
ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS ee te ae iu
PROCEEDINGS OF FORESTRY SECTION sg sé
PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGY SECTION ue =
PROCEEDINGS OF THE BIOLOGY SECTION = a
List oF EXCHANGE SOCIETIES, ETC. ae mS
List OF MEMBERS. ae r< ne yt
70
IxpEx To VoL. XXVI ad = me: xxvii
ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. Vil.
Abstract of Proceedings of the Royal
Society of Queensland
ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS, Marcu 30TH, 1914.
The Annual General Meeting of the Society was held
at the University at 8 p.m
Mr. H. C. Richards, President, in the chair
Twenty-four members and a number of friends were
present.
The minutes of the preceding Annual Meeting were
read and confirmed.
The Secretary read the Report of the Council as
follows :—
* Kight Ordinary Monthly Meetings and nine Council
Meetings were held during the year.
‘During the year six members were admitted. four
died, and fourteen resigned ; of the latter some had left
the State ; others were hampered by increasing age.
“It will thus be seen that we have had unusually
heavy losses by death during the past year. Of these,
the Hon. A. Norton, M.L.C., was a Trustee of the Society,
and an indefatigable worker in its interests. He was the
means of adding many new and valuable members to the
Society, and his presence on deputations was invaluable.
Mr. Jno. Sutton was President in 1899 and a prominent
officer and worker in bygone years. till advancing age
restricted his attendance. The Hon. R. M. Collins was
one of our best pioneers. and took a general interest in
every laudable object. The Hon. Alex Raff was, as a
member of the Philosophical Society. a life member of
Viii. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS.
our Society. A letter of condolence was sent to the re-
latives of the Hon. R. M. Collins, and the same course
is to be pursued in regard to Mr. Sutton and the Hon.
Albert Norton.
‘“ We have now on our roll 14 honorary members and
100 ordinary members.
“Vol. XXIV of our Proceedings was issued during
the year, and proved of great value. Dr. T. Harvey
Johnston, D.Se., our Honorary Librarian, was awarded
the Syme Research prize during the year.
“The forthcoming volume will, on the whole, scarcely
be equal to the average issue. Our more prominent mem-
bers have been too busy with routine work and unavoidable
official duties, and we have not been as fortunate as usual
in chance contributions. The outlook for the present
year is, however, promising, though the visit of the British
Association for the Advancement of Science may absorb
some of our members’ time and energies.
‘ During the absence of Dr. Harvey Johnston, on the
Prickly Pear Commission, the Library exchanges have
been under the care of Mr. C. D. Gillies, and have been well
looked after.
‘In accordance with the wishes of the Honorary
Auditor, the books were closed on December 31st instead
of at a later date, as was usual of recent years. This
reversion to the previous custom makes our credit balance
seem lower, but the financial position of the Society is
quite satisfactory. There are some outstanding subscrip-
tions (about £34) to come in, and it would facilitate the
work of the Council if these and the present year’s sub-
scriptions were forwarded early, as it is intended to issue
the Proceedings at once, the President’s Address and this
Report appearing in the next volume according to reso-
lution.
‘During the year a Sub-section was formed to deal
with the interests of Forestry.”
This report was adopted on the motion of Dr. J. Shirley,
seconded by Mr. C. W. Costin.
ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. ib.
The following financial statement was presented by
the Hon. Treasurer (Mr. J. C. Briinnich) and adopted.
RECEIPTS.
fase a
To Balance from 1912 A ni a bs af AD O98
,, Admission Fees and Subscriptions 3 oi AE 72210) <0
., Sale of Proceedings ee ae a a a 2 on0
., Sundry Small Receipts ee Ad. ci py Se OFSE=10
, By Secretary (Petty Cash) OMS
£115 0 3
EXPENDITURE. a aie
Sees:
By Printing (Pole & Co.) TES Pe Bef
, Po tage of Monthly Notices AD 19). 2
, Postage of Proceedings an1 Tibeaton 8 Postaes ste a OO
, Postage on Circulars OO FP 5
, Insurance le, p4 ots)
5s Weaneral Postage and Petty Cash Sy
, Caretaker and Refreshments Sua th
, Landing Charges 012 9
, Refund to Hon. Secretary ae 012 0
, Tea Urn, Cups, Saucers, Spoons, etc. ee sea)
,, Bank Charges a e . om = se 010 O
, Balance as per Bank Book rs be ee - 18 11 10
£115 0° 3
Examined and found correct.
GEO. WATKINS, Hon. Auditor.
BRISBANE, January 30th, 1914.
lee: BRUNNICH, Hon. Treasurer.
The President then delivered the Annual Address.
Dr. J. Shirley moved, and Mr. D. Eglinton seconded,
a vote of thanks to the President.
There being no other nominations, the President
declared the following gentlemen elected for the coming
year :—
President, J. Shirley, D.Sc.
Hon. Treasurer—J. C. Briinnich, F.I.C.
Hon. Secretary—F. Bennett.
Hon. Librarian—T. Harvey Johnston, M.A., D.Sc.
Asst. Hon. Librarian—C. D. Gillies.
Members of Council—E. H. Gurney, H. C. Richards,
M.Sec., A. B. Walkom, B.Sc., P. L. Weston, B.Sc., B.E.
x. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS.
Mr. G. Watkins was elected Auditor on the motion
of Dr. J. Shirley, seconded by Mr. J. C. Briinnich.
Mr. R. H. Roe was elected a Trustee (in the place of
the Hon. A. Norton, M.L.C., deceased) on the motion of
Dr. J. Shirley, seconded by Mr. F. Bennett.
Mr. Richards, the outgoing President, then installed
Dr. Shirley as President for the coming year, and the
latter returned thanks to the members.
ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS, APRIL 27TH, 1914.
The ordinary monthly meeting of the Royal Society
of Queensland was held in the University, at 8 p.m.
Mr. H. C. Richards in the chair.
The minutes of the previous meeting were read and
confirmed.
The following papers were read :
1. The Composition of the Oil of Prickly Pear Seed
(Opuntia spp.), by Frank Smith, B.Se., F.1L.C.,
and L. A. Meston.
2. Some Oil-bearing Seeds Indigenous to Queensland.
1. The Seed of Macadamia ternifolia and its
Oil. by Frank Smith, B.Sec., F.1.C., and L. A.
Meston.
The uiscussion on these two papers was taken pe: t
in by Messrs. Bennett, Gurney, and Longman, and the
President.
3. Notes on a Plant-bearing Common Black Opal
from Tweed Heads, N.S.W., by Ernest W. Skeats,
D.Sc., A.R.C.S8., F.G.S. (communicated by Mr. H.
C. Richards.)
ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS, May 25TH, 1914.
The ordinary monthly meeting of the Royal Society
of Queensland was held in the University, at 8 p.m.
Dr. J. Shirley, President, in the chair.
The minutes of the previous meeting were read and
confirmed.
Messrs. E. C. Saint-Smith, A.S.T.C., and L. A. Meston
were proposed as members.
ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. ate
The following paper was read :
Radiogenesis in Evolution, by H. A. Longman.
A discussion followed in which Dr. T. H. Johnston,
Dr. Jefferis Turner, Dr. F. Hamilton-Kenny, Messrs.
Briinnich, T. Parker and Bennett, and the President took
part.
Dr. T. Harvey Johnston was welcomed back after his
tour with the Prickly Pear Commission.
ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS, JUNE 29th, 1914.
The ordinary monthly meeting of the Royal Society
of Queensland was held in the School of Arts, at 8 p.m.
Dr. J. Shirley, President, in the chair.
The minutes were deferred to a future meeting.
Miss Alison J. Greene, and Messrs. E. C. Saint-Smith
and L. A. Meston, were elected members.
The following papers were read :
1. Cactz or Prickly Pears, by J. Shirley, D.Sc., and
C. A. Lambert.
Professor Skertchly, Messrs. J. F. Bailey, Briinnich,
and Tryon, and Dr. T. Harvey Johnston took part in
the discussion.
2. Notes on the Marine Mollusca of Queensland,
Part III. By J. Shirley, D.Sc.
Exhibits.
Mr. J. F. Bailey exhibited, on behalf of His Excellency
Sir William MacGregor, botanical specimens obtained by
the Peary Expedition of 1908.
Mr. Dunstan exhibited, also on behalf of His
Excellency, geological specimens obtained by the same
Expedition ; also gold specimens from Gympie.
Mr. Dunstan also exhibited specimens collected by
Mr. Blake during the Australasian Antarctic Expedition :
and also specimens of the siliceous sponge, Purisiphonia,
from the Rolling Downs Formation at Wallumbilla.
ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS, AuGusT 14th, 1914.
The ordinary general meeting of the Royal Society
of Queensland was held in the University, at 8 p.m.
Xii. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS.
Dr. J. Shirley, President, in the chair.
The minutes of the two previous meetings were read
and confirmed.
_ The appointment, by the Council, of Mr. A. B. Walkom
as Hon. Editor of the Proceedings was confirmed, on the
motion of Dr. T. H. Johnston, and Mr. H. A. Longman.
Miss H. Cleminson, B.Sc., was proposed as an Associate
member.
The President announced that a preliminary meeting
had been held in connection with the formation of a Biology
Section, and that details were to be laid before the Council
of the Society’ at its next meeting.
The following papers were read :
1. Some Oil-bearing Seeds Indigenous to Queensland.
II. The oil of Callophyllum inophyllum (Domba
Nut). III. The oil of the seed of Hernandia bwalvis
(Grease Nut). IV. Note on Queensland Candle-
nut Oil. by Frank Smith, B.Sc., F.I.C.
Remarks were made by Messrs. Bagster, Hargreaves
and White.
2. A note on the Precaval System of Hyla cerulea,
White. By C. D. Gillies, B.Sc.
Remarks were made by Dr. T. Harvey Johnston, Miss
Bage and the President.
Exhibits :
Mr. Frank Smith exhibited a series of fruits and oils
illustrating his paper.
The President exhibited specimens of Callophyllum
inophyllum and Hernandia bivalvis.
Dr. T. Harvey Johnston exhibited specimens of Tre-
matodes (see p. 69 of Proceedings).
ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS, SEPTEMBER 28TH, 1914.
The ordinary monthly meeting of the Royal Society
of Queensland was held in the University, at 8 p.m. -
Dr: J. Shirley, President, in the chair.
- The minutes of the previous meeting were read and
confirmed.
ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. Xili.
Miss H. Cleminson, B.Sc., was elected an Associate
member.
Mr. A. P. Dodd was proposed as an ordinary member,
The following paper was read :
Additions to the Rotifera of Queensland, by W. R.
Colledge.
The paper was illustrated by a series of lantern slides.
Miss Bage, Mr. Longman, Dr. T. H. Johnston and the
President. took part in the discussion which followed.
Exhibits :
Dr. T. Harvey Johnston and Mr. C. D. Gillies exhibited
under the microscope a number of living * vinegar eels,”
Anguillula aceti, from vinegar. The exhibit was obtained’
in Brisbane.
Mr. W. R. Colledge exhibited a number of Rotifers
under the microscope.
ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS, NOVEMBER 9th, 1914.
The monthly meeting of the Royal Society of Queens-
land was held in the University, at 8 p.m.
Dr. J. Shirley, President, in the chair.
The minutes of the previous meeting were read and
confirmed.
Mr. Alan P. Dodd was elected a member.
The President announced the action taken by the
Forestry Section (see proceedings of Forestry Section).
He also announced that the Council had selected
Dr. W. F. Taylor as Trustee in the place of Mr. John Cameron,
deceased. Dr. Taylor had signified his willingness to act,
and his appointment was confirmed by the meeting.
The following papers were read :—
1. Further new genera and species of Australian
Proctotrypoidea, by Alan P. Dodd.
The paper was communicated by the President.
Remarks were made by Mr. Colledge, and Dr. T. Harvey
Johnston.
2. The freezing point of some Abnormal Milks, by
J. B. Henderson, F.1.C., and L. A. Meston.
Messrs. L. A. Meston, and F. Smith offered remarks:
M
Aa
xiv. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS.
3. Some new Queensland Endoparasites, by T. Harvey
Johnston, M.A., D.Sc.
Remarks were made by Mr. H. A. Longman.
ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS, NOVEMBER 30TH, 1914.
A special general meeting of the Royal Society of
Queensland was held in the University, at 8 p.m.
Mr. T. R. Pearce was proposed as a member.
The rules as revised by a sub-committee of the
Council were submitted to the meeting for approval, and
were adopted without further alteration.
The following paper was read:
The Geology and Petrology of the Enoggera Granite
and the Allied Intrusives, by W. H. Bryan, B.&c.
Remarks were made by Messrs. Richards and
Walkom, and Dr. Shirley.
The President announced that the proceedings for the
present year would be ready in December.
Exhibits :
Dr. T. Harvey Johnston exhibited under the micro-
scope some interesting fresh water Protozoa, including
Peridinium sp. and Ceratiwm sp. from the Enoggera
Reservoir, and an Actinospherium found in abundance
amongst wet moss on the cliffs near the sea-shore at
Caloundra.
Mr. H. A. Longman exhibited a live specimen of
Dipsadomorphus fuscus, Gray, the brown tree snake,
captured at Toowong. /
PROCEEDINGS OF FORESTRY SECTION. DE Vrs
Proceedings of Forestry Section.
AUSTRALIAN ForEST LEAGUE.
A conference of representatives of the various branches
of the League was held in the Town Hall, Melbourne, on
October 29th last, His Excellency Sir Ronald Munro-
Ferguson presiding.
The Queensland Section was represented by Hon. L.
E. Groom and Mr. Stumm, Federal members for the
Darling Downs and Lilley electorates. Messrs. Maughan
and Turley were also asked to act as representatives,
but they were unable to be present.
It was moved by Professor Watt (Sydney), “ that this
meeting approves of the formation of a national organiza-
tion to be called The Australian Forest League.”
Mr. Groom in seconding referred to the rapid disappear-
ance of our soft timbers, and to the greatly increased im-
port of pine, when with conservation we might have supplied
all our wants for years to come.
The following officers were elected :—Patron, Sir
Ronald Munro-Ferguson; Federal President, Sir Frank
Madden ; Secretary, Dr. Harvey Sutton.
VA PROCEEDINGS OF GEOLOGY SECTION.
Abstract of Proceedings of Geology Section.
MEETING, JUNE 4th, 1914.
A meeting was held on Thursday, June 4th, with
the object of forming a Geology Section of the Royal Society
of Queensland. The following were present: Messrs. L.
C. Ball, W. H. Bryan, B. Dunst n, H. C. Richards, E. C.
Saint-Smith and A. B. Walkom.
Office bearers were elected as follows :—President
B. Dunstan, F.G.S.; Vice-President, H. C. Richards. M.Sc.,
Hon. Secretary, A. B. Walkom, B.Sc.
It was carried, “* that the aim of the Section be prim-
arily for the general discussion of geological matters, both
academic and economic, pertaining particularly to Australia ;
the discussion of current literature in Geology, and the
exhibition of specimens of particular interest to members
of the Section.’
I
The order of business at meetings was decided on as
follows :—
1. Minutes.
2. Correspondence.
3. Current literature.
4. Exhibits.
5. Discussion.
6. General. .
MEETING, JUNE 30th, 1914.
Mr. Dunstan in the chair.
Eight members and one visitor present.
Mr. Dunstan exhibited specimens of a siliceous sponge
(Purisiphonia clarke) from the Rolling Downs Formation, |
near Roma.
A discussion followed, the subject being the intake
beds of the Australian Artesian Water Basin. Messrs.
Saint-Smith, Dunstan, Richards, Thom, and Walkom,
and Dr. Shirley, took part in the discussion.
PROCEEDINGS OF GEOLOGY SECTION. XVI -
The discussion tended to show that the main intake
beds are freshwater sandstones containing fossil plant
remains indicating a Trias-Jura age. These beds lie con-
formably below the Rolling Downs Formation, which
contain plentiful remains of marine shells.
It was pointed out by Mr. Saint-Smith that in the
country to the N.E. and E. of Roma, the desert sandstone
formation is non-existent, and that areas previously mapped
as Desert Sandstone are occupied by beds of either the Trias-
Jura System or Rolling Downs Formation. It was also
pointed out that the so-called Blythesdale Braystone as
mapped is made up partly of porous sandstone of Trias-
Jura age, and partly of impervious calcareous beds of the
Rolling Downs Formation.
The most important point brought out by the dis-
cussion was the fact that the intake beds occupy a much
greater area than was formerly supposed, including, as they
now do, a large area of rocks of Trias-Jura age.
MEETING, JULY 30TH, 1914.
Mr. Dunstan in the chair.
Ten members were present.
Mr. Dunstan exhibited specimens of fossil cephalopods
from Western Queensland, including Nautilus, Ammonites,
Crioceras and Belemnites.
Mr. Richards exhibited a specimen of galena showing
twinning.
A discussion took place on the possibility of obtaining
oil at Roma. Mr. Cameron opened the discussion, out-
lining the history of the boring operations at Roma.
Messrs. Connah, Dunstan, Richards, Saint-Smith, and
Walkom took part in the discussion.
MEETING, OcTOBER Ist, 1914.
Mr. Dunstan in the chair.
Seven members and one visitor were present.
Mr. Blake exhibited a specimen of Emperor Penguin.
A discussion took place on ‘‘ Recent developments in the’
Burrum Coalfield.’”’ Mr. Dunstan outlined the work done
on the Burrum field, showing the relations existing between
xViil. PROCEEDINGS OF GEOLOGY SECTION.
the coal measures and marine beds. Messrs. Richards,
Cameron, Ball, and Walkom, and Dr. Shirley contributed
to the discussion.
MeeEtTInG, NOVEMBER 12TH, 1914.
Mr. Dunstan in the chair.
Seven members were present.
After some discussion it was decided that the subject
for the next meeting, to be held about the end of March,
1915, should be ‘“‘ The Oxley Beds.”
A discussion took place on ‘“ Rock Classification.”
Mr. Richards introduced the subject, and gave a summary
of the various systems of rock classification.
Messrs. Ball and Dunstan, and Dr. Shirley took part
in the discussion.
PROCEEDINGS OF BIOLOGY SECTION. XIX.
Proceedings of Biology Section.
MEETING, .SEPTEMBER 8TH, 1914.
Dr. J. Shirley in the chair.
Six members present.
Dr. Shirley exhibited specimens of the ‘“‘Grey Gum”’ of
Queensland, and pointed out that the Queensland Grey
Gum, though usually set down as EL. saligna does not agree
_ with the description of the species given in Miller’s Eucalypts
of Australia. It is probable that the tree referred to by
Queensland botanists as H. botryoides, Smith, is the true
HE. saligna. Among the specimens supplied to Dr. Shirley
as examples of Grey Gum, from various parts of Queens-
land were :— EH. melliodora, E. baueriana, and EF. propinqua.
Most of those present took part in a discussion of
the fruits, leaves, etc., Mr. Smith pointing out the relation
existing between the type of venation and the kind of
products obtained from Eucalyptus leaves.
MEETING, OcToOBER 13TH, 1914.
Dr. J. Shirley in the chair.
Three members and one visitor present.
Dr. Shirley exhibited specimens of several different
species of Chitons, a group belonging to the class Amphi-
neura of the Mollusca. He then gave a short description
of their distribution and general anatomy, illustrated by
reference to the specimens.
The chairman pointed out that the group is not a typical
Molluscan one, especially in regard to its nervous system,
which is simple. Some discussion ensued as to whether
this signiffed a primitive or a degenerate form, Dr. Shirley
inclining to the former view.
xx. PROCEEDINGS OF BIOLOGY SECTION.
MEETING, NOVEMBER 10TH, 1914.
Dr. J. Shirley in the chair.
Five members present.
Mr. W. R. Colledge exhibited some slides and micro-
photographs of a family of flies, Simulide. He pointed
out that this family is distributed all over the world, but
its representatives are not very numerous in Australia.
In Europe and America they are injurious to stock. A
short description of their life-history and general appear-
ance was given by Mr. Colledge, with reference to the
photos and slides.
Dr. Shirley referred to the investigations lately being
made in regard to one of the species of Simulium as a
carrier of a disease of the scalp, prevalent in Italy and
Roumani2.
LIST OF EXCHANGE SOCIETIES, ETC. eK
List of Societies and _ Institutions with
which the Royal Society of Queensland
exchanges Publications.
AFRICA. | Unitrep Srares—Continued.
Sounm AFRICA. Boston Society of Natural History-
’ s 7 Sir : Californian Academy of Science.
Geological Commission, Cape of . Z ; :
Good Hope Carnegie Institute.
| -
Natal Museum. Colorado State College.
| Dept. of Agriculture, Washington,
AMERICA. DC.
Cues Dept. of Commerce and Labour,
Washington, D.C.
Canadian Institute. Field Museum of Natural History,
Hamilton Association.
Chicago.
Literary and Historical Society, | Geographical Society of Phila-
Quebec. _ delphia.
Nova Scotia Institute of Natural | Geological and Natural History
Science: Society of Minnesota.
Royal Astronomical Society of | Geological Survey of California.
Canada. Geological Survey of U.S.A.
Royal Society of Canada. Washington, D.C.
Illinois State Laboratory.
Indiana Academy of Sciene..
Kansas Academy of Scicnce.
Lloyd Library, Cincinatti.
Massachusetts General Hospital.
Minnesota Academy of Natural
MEXIco. |
Instituto Geologico de Mexico
Meteorologico Observatorio.
Societa Cientifica, Mexico.
UNITED STATES.
Science.
Academy of Natural Sciences, | Missouri Botanic Gardens, St.
Philadelphia. | Louis.
Academy of Science, Rochester, New York Academy of Sciences.
N.Y. | Smithsonian Institution, Washing-
Academy of Science, Wisconsin. ton, D.C.
American Academy of Arts and University of California, Berkeley.
Scieaces, Boston. University of Kansas.
American Geographical Society, University of Minnesota.
N.Y. University of Montana.
American Mathematical Society, University of New York.
ae \ Wilson Ornithological Club.
American Museum of Natural é
History, N.Y. | Urvuavay.
American Philosophical Society, | Instituto de Pesca, Monte Video.
Philade:phia. Museo Nacionale, Monte Video.
XXil.
ASIA.
CEYLON.
Colombo Museum.
INDIA.
Agriculture Institute, Pusa, Bengal.
Asiatic Society of Bengal.
Board of Scientific
India.
Advice for
Director Gereral, Indian Medical
Service (‘‘ Paludism.’’)
Geological Survey of India.
Superintendent of Govt. Printing,
Calcutta.
JAVA.
Chef van het Mijnwesen.
(see also under Holland).
PHILLIPINE ISLANDS.
Bureau of Science, Manila.
Manila Medical Society.
AUSTRALASIA.
New Sourn WAtzes.
Australasian Association for the
Advancement of Science.
_ Australian Museum, Sydney.
Botanic Gardens, Sydney.
Department of Agriculture.
Department of Mines.
Field Naturalists’ Club.
Linnean Society of N.S.W.
Public Library, Sydney.
Royal Anthropological Society.
Royal Society of N.S.W.
Technological Museum, Sydney.
The University of Sydney.
New ZEALAND.
Auckland Institute.
Colonial Museum, Wellington.
Geological Survey.
New Zealand Institute.
QUEENSLAND.
Colonial Botanist, Brisbane.
Department of Mines.
Field Naturalists’ Club.
Public Library, Brisbane.
The Queensland Museum, Brisbane.
The University of Queensland,
Brisbane.
!
'
LIST OF EXCHANGE SOCIETIES, ETC.
SoutH AusTRALIA.
Department of Mines.
National Museum, Adelaide.
Royal Geographical Society.
Royal Society of S.A.
The University of Adelaide.
TASMANIA.
Field Naturalists’ Club.
Royal Society of Tasmania.
The University of Tasmania.
VICTORIA.
Australian Institute of Mining
Engineers.
Australian Ornithologists’ Union.
Department of Agriculture.
Dept. of Fisheries (Commonwealth).
Department of Mines.
Field Naturalists’ Society of Vic-
toria.
Government Botanist, Melbourne.
National Museum, Melbourne.
Public Library, Melbourne.
Royal Geographical Society.
Royal Society of Victoria.
The University of Melbourne.
WESTERN AUSTRALIA.
Department of Mines.
Museum, Perth.
Royal Society of W.A.
Natural History Society).
The University of W.A.
W.A. Astronomical Society.
(late
EUROPE.
AUSTRIA.
Astronomische Arbeiten, Vienna.
K.K. Geographische Gesellschaft.
K.K. Gradmessige Bureau.
BELGIUM.
Academie Royale de Belgique.
Jardin Botanique de _ TlEtat,
Brussels.
Société Royale de Botanique de
Belgique.
Solvay Institute of Sociology,
Brussels.
LIST OF EXCHANGE SOCIETIES, ETC.
ENGLAND.
British Museum.
Cambridge Philosophical Society.
Conchological Society.
Imperial Institute.
Linnean Society of London.
Philosophical and Literary Society,
Leeds.
Philosophical and Literary Society,
Manchester.
Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew.
Royal Colonial Institute.
Royal Society of London.
FRANCE.
Faculté des jeunes Naturalistes,
Paris.
Faculté des Sciences, Marseilles.
Institute de Zoologie del Universite
de Montpellier.
Museum de _ Histoire naturelle,
Paris.
Société des Sciences naturelles,
Nantes.
GERMANY.
Naturforschende Gesellschaft,
Frankfurt-am-Main.
Naturhistorischer Verein der
Preussischen Rheinland and
Westfalens, Bonn.
Verein fiir Naturkunde zu Cassel,
HOLuanp.
Koninklyke Naturkundige
Vereenigingin Nederlandsch.
(See also under Java).
HUNGARY.
Naturwissenschaftliche Verein de
Kormitates, Trencsin.
IRELAND.
Royal Irish Academy.
ITALY.
Academia Real della Scienza della
Instituto Bologna.
XXili.
ITraLy—Continued.
Laboratorio di Zoologia Generale
di Agraria.
Museo Civico di Storia Naturale,
Genoa.
Rassegna Mensile di Botanica
(‘“‘ Malpighia”’), Catania.
Societa Africana d’Italiana, Naples.
Societa Toscana di Scienze Naturale,
Pisa.
PORTUGAL.
Academia
(Oporto).
Polytechnica Porto
Russta.
Imperiale Academie des Sciences,
Petrograd.
Societe des Naturalistes, Kazan.
Societé Imperiale Russe de
Geographie, Petrograd.
SCOTLAND.
Botanical Society of Edinburgh.
Royal Botanic Gardens.
Royal Observatory.
Royal Society of Edinburgh.
SPAIN.
Academia Real de Ciencias, Madrid.
Academia Real dell Ciencias y
Artes, Barcelona.
SWEDEN.
Geological Institute, Upsala.
SWITZERLAND.
Naturforschende Gesellschaft, Basel,
Naturforschende Gesellschaft,
Zurich.
Société de Physique et d Histoire
Naturelle, Geneva.
OCEANIA.
SANDWICH ISLANDS.
Bernice Pauahi Bishop Museum,
Honelulu.
LIST OF
MEMBERS.
List of Members.
CORRESPONDING
Brown, Rev. G., D.D.
Cockle, Dr.
t Danes, Dr. J. V.
David, Professor T.W.E.
¢ Domin, Dr. K.
{ Hedley, C., F.L.S.
{ Jensen, H. I., D.Sc.
MEMBERS.
Methodist Mission Office, Castlereagh St. ,
Sydney, N.S.W.
Czech University, Prague, Bohemia.
The University, Sydney, N.S.W.
Czech University, Prague, Bohemia.
Australian Museum, Sydney, N.S.W.
Darwin, Northern Territory.
Liversidge, Prof. A., F.R.S. Fieldhead, Coombe Warren, Kingston Hill,
Maiden, J. H., F.L.S.
th t+
Pollock, Prof. J.A.
Rennie, Professor E. H.
Professor E. W.
Skeats,
++
Surrey, England.
Botanic Gardens, Sydney, N.S.W.
Maitland, A. Gibb, F.G.S. Geological Survey Office, Perth, W.A.
The University, Sydney, N.S.W.
The University, Adelaide, S.A.
The University, Melbourne, Vic.
ORDINARY MEMBERS, Erc.
Archer, R. S
Badger, J. S.
Bage, Miss F., M.Sc.
Bagster, L. a ae
{ Ball, L. C.,
+} Bailey, F.M.,
F.L.S.
tTBailey, J. F.
Barton, E. C.,
Bell, D. J.
Bennett, F.
aa
t+ t+
Brydon, Mrs.
{*Bryan, W. H., B.Sc.
Bundock, Miss A.
Bundock, C. W..
t Byram, W. J. 4
Cameron, W. E., B.A. ..
B.A.
*Cleminson, Miss H., B.Sc.
+ Colledge, W. R.
A.M.I.C.E.
Brinnich, J. C., F.C.
Gracemere, Rockhampton
C/o Brisbane Tramways Co., Ltd., Brisbane-
The Women’s College, Kangaroo Pt., Brisbane.
The University; Brisbane.
Geological Survey Office, George St., Brisbane.
Dept. of Agriculture, Brisbane.
Botanic Gardens, Brisbane.
Service Institute, Valley, Brisbane.
State School, Eagle Junction, Brisbane.
State School, Toowong, Brisbane.
Agricultural Chemist’s Lab., William
Brisbane.
Technical College, Ann Street, Brisbane.
Technical College, Ipswich.
St ,
* Kooralbyn,” Beaudesert.
* Kooralbyn,’ Beaudesert.
Queen Street, Brisbane.
Geological Survey Office, George St., Brisbane.
The Women’s College, Kangaroo Pt., Brisbane.
Friendly Societies’ Dispensary, Queen St.,
Brisbane.
Life Members.
++ kX
Associate Members.
Membars who have contributed papers to the Society.
LIST OF MEMBERS.
Collins, Miss J.
Connah, F., F.I.C-.
Cooper, Sir Pope A.
Costin, C. W.
Cowley, R. C.
Denham, H. G., M.A.,
D.Se:, Ph.D:
Dodd, Alan P. ..
Dunstan, B. ae
Eglinton, D F. R. JAG Saher
Fraser, C. S
+ Gailey, R :
Gibson, Hon. A.
+ Gillies, C. D., B.Sc.
Greene, Miss A.
Greenfield, A. P.
+ Griffith, Sir 8. W.
Gurney, E. H.
Halstead, W. H.
Hamlyn- Harris, R., D.Sc.
+ Henderson, J. B., F.1.C.
Hirschfeld, E., M.D.,
MLC.
Holland, C.
Hilsen, R.
Hunt, G. W.
+t Ilhdge, R
W.
t}Jack, R. L.,. F.R.G.S.
Jackson, A. J.
Johnston, T. eae M.A.
D.Se.
Johnston, J.
++
Kenny, Dr. F. Hamilton
iia wbert, ‘C: A
Longman, H. A.
Lord, F.
Love, Dr. W.
iucassebrs (EPs
++ ++
++ 44+
Lusby, 8. G., M.A.
McKillop, Miss M. E.
Marks, Hon. Dr., M.L.C.
May, Dr.
XXV.
Beaudesert.
Govt. Analyst’s Department, Brisbane.
Supreme Court, Brisbane.
Parliament House, Brisbane.
Pharmacy College, Elizabeth St.,
* Mundoolun,”’
Brisbane.
The University, Brisbane.
Sugar Experiment Station, Gordon Vale, via
Cairns.
Geological Survey Office, George St., Brisbane.
River Road, Toowong, Brisbane.
Queen Street, Brisbane.
Courier Buildings, Queen Street,
Bingera, Queensland.
The University, Brisbane.
High Schoo!, Wynnum.
George Street, Brisbane.
Brisbane,
Agricultural Chemist’s Lab.,
Brisbane.
State School, E. Brisbane.
Queensland Museum, Brisbane.
Govt. Analyst, Brisbane.
William St.,
Wickham Terrace, Brisbane.
Stock Dept., Brisbane.
Edward St., Brisbane.
Southport.
Commercial Union Assurance Co.,
Eagle Street, Brisbane.
Norwich Chambers,
N.S. W.
Synchronome Co.,
Ltd.,
Hunter St., Sydney,
Ann St., Brisbane.
The University, Brisbane.
Dept. of Public Instruction,
Brisbane.
344 Queen St., Brisbane.
Bank of N.S.W., Warwick, Q.
Queensland Museum, Brisbane.
Sykes Street, Clayfield.
Wickham Terrace.
Vera Papaw Hospital,
Sts., New Farm.
The University, Brisbane.
Austral College, Ann St., Brisbane.
Wickham Terrace, Brisbane.
Bundaberg.
George St.,
Moray and Sydney
* Associate Members.
+ Life Members.
t{ Members who have contributed papers to the Society.
.Q file
¢ Meston, L. A. ..
~ McCall,’ T., F.1.C.
++
=—fe
++ ++
+
om of
McConnell, E. W. Y
Morris; i: ©.) AcM1.C.E:
Morton, C. R.
Murray-Prior, Miss M. E.
Parker, T., F.G.S.
Parker, W. R., L.D.S.
Parnell, T., M.A. ;
Pound, C. J., F.R.M.S.
Priestley, Prof. H. J., M.A.
Richards, H. C., M.Se.
Riddell, R. M
Roe, RB: He, McA:
Ryan, J. P.
Saint-Smith, E. C.
ASVIEG;
Sankey, J. R. Oe
Saunders, G. J., B.E.
Schild, S. D., A.S.A.S.M.
Schneider, H., M.A.
Shirley J., D.Sc.
Smith, F., B.Sc., F.1.C.
Spark, E. G.
Steele, Prof. B. D., D.Se.
Steele, T., F.L.S., F.E.S.
Stevens, Hon. E. J., M.L.C.
Sutton, A. oe at
Swanwick, K.ff., B.A.,
LL.B. es
Taylor, Hon. W. F., MLC.
Thynne, Hon. A. J., M.L.C.
Turner, A. J., M.D.
F.E.S.
Walkom, a B., B.Sc.
Watkins, G.
Watkins, J. W.
Weedon, W.
Weston, P. L., B.Sc., B.E.
White, C. F.
LIST OF MEMBERS.
Govt. Analyst’s Dept., Brisbane.
Govt. Analyst’s Dept., Brisbane.
Mt. Brisbane, Esk, Q.
Dept. of Public Instruction, George St.,
Brisbane.
State School, Yeronga.
“Maroon,” Beaudesert, Q.
“ Tynedale,” Gertrude St., Brisbane.
Edward St., Brisbane.
The University, Brisbane.
Bacteriological Institute, Yeerongpilly.
The University, Brisbane.
The University, Brisbane.
Technical College, Ann St., Brisbane.
Queensland Club, Brisbane.
Gympie.
Geological Survey Office, George St.,
Brisbane.
Flavelle’s, Queen St., Brisbane.
Technical College, Ann St., Brisbane.
Technical College, Ann St., Brisbane.
Nerang Creek, Q.
Abbotsford Rd., Bowen Hills, Brisbane.
Govt. Agricultural Chemist’s Lab., William
St., Brisbane.
Vulture St., Brisbane.
The University, Brisbane.
C.S.R. Co., O’Connell St., Sydney, N.S.W,
Courier Office, Brisbane.
‘““ Montpelier,” Wickham Terrace, Brisbane.
The University, Brisbane.
George St., Brisbane.
Edward St., Brisbane.
Wickham Terrace, Brisbane.
The University, Brisbane.
Queen St., Brisbane.
State School, Manly, Q.
Selby House, Wickham Terrace, Brisbane.
The University, Brisbane.
C/o Colonial Botanist, Dept. of Agriculture,
Brisbane.
-———
* Associate Members.
+ Life Members.
t Members who have contributed papers to the Society.
INDEX TO VOLUME XXvVI.
Index to Volume XXVI.
Page
Acanthochites costatus 50
. rejectus 50
as variabilis 50
Acolus bidentatus 127
Actinospherium .. se xiv
Actinurus neptunius A ane 71
Agamonema sp... ae 82, 8, S4
Aleurites moluccana 62
re triloba 62
Ammonoidea 35
Anapus ovalis 75
Anguillula aceti xiii
Anteon parvulus 130
Anurecea aculeata 75
- corhlearis 75
34 tecta ss 75
Arca corpulenta 2
» susca : 42
,, imbricata se 53
». pistachia se 4s
Arsinoitherium ae 37
Asplanchna amphora he 72
an bright ellii.. 72
intermedia 72
Di eeianennonts myremlio G2
Austroscelio ive 93
a nigricoxra . 93, 94
ce, robustus ale 94
Baryconus citreus 109
$3 delicatulus 107
+3 duleis 108
ES fasciatus 109
ie gloriosus 109
33 maculatus 109
5 rariipes 108
Biuterina 77, 80
Brachionus ang filets 74
fa bakerti w4
= faleatus 74
3 militaris 74
* pala - an 74
a6 >» var. amphiceros 74
os rubens 5 74
FA urecolus we AG 74
Bryan, W. H.: Geology and
Petrology of the Enoggera
Granite and the allied In-
trusives of ae 141
Cacachroa de-orticata oy se 80
XV
Page
Cacte or Prickly Peara 40
Calliostoma comptum 51
= polychioma 51
55 purpureo-cinctum 51
Callochiton platessa a 4Q
Callophyllum inophyllum .. as xii
Callopyhiium hy are: The
Oil of, 5@
Calyptrea pellucida 52
4 tenuis ae ae, ae
Candle-nut Oil. Note on Queens-
land, : es 62
Cantharidus foirniens aul
os oberwimmeri 51
Cardita calyculata 53
Cathypna brachydactyla é 74
A leontina 74
i luna 74
- ungulata 74
Cephalosiphon limnias 71
Ceratium sp. xiv
Ceratobeoides spinosus 125.
Ceratobeeus flaviventris — .. : 126
Cereus qrandiflorus 4 42 4G
Cerithium lactum 52
33 piperitum 52
(f polygonum 52
spiculum 52
ie Strictum 52
Chiton nr. coxi 50
rs limans 50
Clava nodulosa ae 52
Cochleave turbo 74
Celodon aversus 49
pachyurus eS og i
Copidoglanis tandanus as as 69
Crematoscelio jlaviventris ae 110
Culcitella .. S2 5 ae 80
Cymatium dolarium Be is 52
Crytonia tuba berber Ae 72
Dendrocerus varieqatus 132
x3 vartipes 133
Diachiza ceca as 45 ore 73
paeta i = as 73
- semiaperta Be aye 73
Dicroteleia qlab. iscutellum 106
53 solitaria 105
Diglena jorcipata - ss 72
ae grandis 72
Dinocharis collinsii 73
Js tetractis 73
Diplax triaona 73
Diplois daviesie As a 73
Dipnoid Fish a 53 AC 35
Diprotodon : “6 30, 36
Dipsadomor phus Wisi xiv
Dissoleus 23 ‘ 121
Diurella pee Py 73
Dodd, Alan tare New
Genera an Species of ANs-
tralian Proctotrypoidea 91
Dolichosaccus ischurus a sis 69
Donarx nitida xe a pi 49
reruinus at ae 3. 49
Echinocactus Sts _ 42
26 euresii ee a 46
Echinorhynchus hyle Ste .. 83, 84
Emarginula haiula a 2 50
: a dilecta zoe a 50
Encyitoscelio. 119
sis Mii isstmius a 120
Endoparasites (Trematoda) Bk: 69
Endoparasites. Some= New
Queensland, 76
Enoggera Granite: Gesines Wand
Petrology of, and Pematey
Intrusives se 41
Eoanthropus dawsont = Sie 38
Eosphora aurita at as 72
. digitata Ms = 72
Eucalyptus baueriana xix
2. botryoides xix
7 melliodora xix
“3 propinqua xix
x saligna at xix
Euchlanis dilatata ae das 73
a oropha = i de 73
9 triquetra se as 73
INDEX TO VOLUME XXXVI.
Page
Eulima constellata fa
E piperita 54
Evolution. Radiocoueaige in, 23
Floscularia campanulata 71
+ co, onetta 71
Be longicaudata if 71
+ ornata ate =a 71
ae trilohata jit
Furcularia equales 73
# forjicula 73
55 longiseta 73
- melandicus 73
Wa microphus 73
Gastropus minor 75
aa stylifer “es - 75
Geology and Petrology of the
Enoggera Granite and the
allied Intrusives ‘ 141
Gillies. C. D.: A Note on ie
Precaval Svstem of Hyla
c@rulea, White. 2 Bo
Hadronotoides 93
3 meridianus We 101
: pentatomus 101, 102
rp reticulatus Ae 102
Hadronotus 52.083, 119; 120
aquaticus 103
rr nigricora sa 103
Henderson, J. PB. and Meston
I.. A.: The Freezing Point
of Some Abnorma! Milks 85
Hernandia bivalvis Ae 5 xii
Hernandia bivalvis. The Oi! of
the Seed of. a Bs 59
Hoplogryon nigriventris 127
Hooloteleia aureiscapus ae 96
5 australica 95, 96, 97
australica “occidentalis 96
re yracilicornis oe 97
fs nigricornis . 95, 96
persimilis ae 96
= sculpturata . 96, 97
Hyla aurea : 66. 67, 83
3, c@rulea 65, 66, 67, 69, 82, 83, 84
. cerulea, White. A Note
on the Preeaval System of, 59
Hypsiprymnus 36
Travadia clathrata 51
Ischnochiton crispus 49
a4 divergens ~ 49
Pf smaradginus 49
se smaragdinus picturatus 50
Tsoparoichis trisimilitubis 69
Johnston, T. H.—
Notes and Exhibits : 69
Some New Oueensland Endo-
parasites om “ga 76
Kodurite.. ae Ae Qa
INDEX TO VOLUME XXVI.
Lavinularia eiliptica
on racemovata
a. 3s socialis ae .-
Lambert. C. A. (see Shirley, J.
and Lambert.)
Laruus nobilis
Limnias annulata
55 ecevatophylli
Litsea sebitera
% Sstocksii
a zeylanica
Locusta danica
Longman, H. A.:
In Kvolution
Luqocerus aterrimus
5S ornatus |
114, “115, ‘117,
Radiogenesis
Macadamia ternifolia a
x var. inteyri-
folia
Macrocystis -
Macroteleia apicalis
e distineta
Mallateleia ashmeadi
os frersteri
is wmestwoody
Mammillaria 4 5
Megalotrocha albojlavicans
= semibulla
ce spinoza
Meyaspilus australicus
CONS PiCUUS
se Jlavicinetus
ne punctativentris
Melicerta conifera
oe ringens
oF tubicola
Melocactus
Meston, !..
Meston, also
Mestson)
Metopidia acuminata
s lepadella si
PA oblonga
5 ohioensis
; ovalis
A oxzysternum
ba solidus
ne triptera
Microdida chlena ae
Milks. The Freezing Point of
Some Abnormal,
Mitra cookii
ss delicata ae +6 ans
San ESCULDENAS) 2 Se
>» vVariabilis .. aie
Mollusca. Notes on ines Marine:
of Queensland, Part IIT, ..
Monostyla bulla 36 Bc oe
= cornuta ee an
Ap lunaris ais Ac
=A quadridentata ote
Muyurmecobius Ae ws oe
A. (see Smith, F. and
Henderson and
Page
71
71
7)
62
71
71
62
62
62
118
23
139
140
135
133
135
134
71
71
71
42
74
74
74
74
74
74
74
74
72
85
54
53
53
54
48
74
74
74
74
36
p.@. Th.
Page
Nautiloidea 35
Neodryinus lroebeli 130
A nelsoni 130
5 raptor 130
A trilineatus 129
Nopalea coccinellifera 43
F deiecta 43
Notammata aurita 72
brachionus 72
3 clavulata 72
Noteus quadricornis 74
Notops brachionus 72
Re clavulatus 72
Notoryctes 36
Nototherium 30
eistes brachiatus : wo
» erystallinus oe i 71
(nothera lamarckiana 2%
Oil. Note on poccunlane eanties
nut = Be 62
Oil. Composition iad tile: of
Prickly-pear Seed : 12
Oil of Callophylium incunaineet 56
Oil of the Seed of Hernandia
bivalvis ‘ 59
Oil-bearing Seeds Tndivenene te
Queensland 2 oLb.eaG
Opal. Notes on a Piet Spenrie
oan oe from Tweed
Heads, N.S.W ‘¢ 18
Opuntia Guraniica 41, 43, 44, 45
. dillenii ER 43
Rs ficus-indica be is 43
35 inermis 41, 43, 44, 45
“ monacantha 43, 45
35 nigricans 43
=S tomentosa 43
5: Sp. 12
Ornithochiton quercinus .. oe 50
Oxyscelio rugosa .. os aie 106
Pachycephala rufiventris 76, 80
Paratelenomus 121
Paruterina ite a es 80
Pecten limatula ac 53
Pedalion mirum 75
Peireskia aculeata 42, 43, 45
Pentacantha nigrinotum 128
Peridinium .. é Xiv
Petrology. The Meveloomient of";
during the present century 1
Phanuromyia ot: 121
rufobasilis Bic 121
Phascologaile cristicauda .. 30
Phascolomys we ss oy 36
Philodina citrina sic : 71
x megalotrocha .. ce 71
Plastoaryon elegans 4 94
+ unicolor ot: ts 94
Platyyastroides nitens a are 131
5 nitidus 3 a5 130
Platyteleia latipennis ae es 101
KxXX.
Page
Plazxiphora costata ae o 50
Pleosoma lenticulares ae 75
Polyarthra platyptera = = [2
Prickly-pear Seed. Oil of ie 12
Prickly-Pears. Cacte or. cS 40
Proales parasitica zd sXe 73
: sordida ba Sr se 3
Proctotrypoidea. Further new
Genera and pedis of Anus-
tralian, 3 oF ar 91
Pterodina incisa = os 74
A patina Be, ad 74
reflexa a a 74
Purisiphonia ae ie ade xi
ne clarket a xvi
Pyrene acleonta ee - ae 54
ar filmere =& are 33 52
“f jaspidea os 5 a 54
Pyrgula clathi ata : “35 51
Radiogenesis in Evolution bk 23
Rattulis bicornis .. bs a 7e
5 bicristata aie EA iss
. birostris we is 73
5 cerinatus of Be 73
a} elongata 4 a 73
0 MUCOSUB.. oA Bic 73
as tigris os ave Ee 73
Retusa decussata 55
5 impasta ef 5% st 55
Rhabdometra . z 80
Rhipsalis salicornoides 43, 47
Richards, H. C.: The Develop-
ment of Petrology during the
present century we ae 1
Ringicula arctata
35 COTO 7 - ais as 55
5 denticulata ae 55
5 doliaris vs eo 54
Rotifer vulgaris as as de 71
Rotifera. Additions to the, of
Queensland .. ae acd 70
Sacculus viridis .. ¥: a 72
Salpina brevispina a is 73
5 cortina es a < 73
a eustata ae =f a 73
= macracantha ei a 73
9 ventralis a =e 73
Sarcophilus ot ao ae 36
Scaliola bella 3 et Ae 51
5 lapillifera ae He 51]
Scaridium eudactylotum .. ae, 73
lonaicaudum .. 73
Scelio ajfinis ie, 116
austialis 112, 114, 115, 116,117,118
chortoicetes 111, 118
cruentatus LOS un?
diemenensis .. 111, 114
flavicornis sis, 112
froggatti 111, 118
fulgidus At 1s
locust@ ate “12, 117, 118
INDEX TO VOLUME
XXVI.
Page
Scelio nigricornis ee sia iil
s, nigricozxa DS, ate 1, 11.6
5, nigriscutellum mg 110
orientalis te 412, 117
ovi LID 214, IVS) 1G Ab; 118
parvicornis 111, 113, 114
perplezrus > ie a7
pilosiceps 2 eres 117
:s pilosus 112, 116
s, pulchellus 1 LES
punctaticeps itr he ba WF)
5 Ssemisanguineus A. 110
., striatifacies tS
. varipunctatus 111
>» Sp 118
Scone aiviedin 104
a2 concoloripes 104
as hyalinipennis : 107
BS magniclava 103, 104
oy montana 167
nigriclara 104
“A nigricora 107
3 rugulosa 107
Seeds. Some Oil-bearing, iedigee:
. ous to Queensland 15, 56
Shirley, J.: Notes on the Marine
Mollusca of Queensland, Part
I ue ee 48
Shirley J. and Lambert, C. A.:
Cacte of Prickly Pears 40
Sida retusa 40
Simulium Xx
Skeats, E. W. Waike ona ietane
bearing common Black Opal
from Tweed Heads, N.S.W. 18
Smith, F.: Some Oil-bearirg
Seeds a asete to ines
land II. é 3 = 56
Iii. 59
: TN ie oa 62
Smith, F. and Meston, Sn At
Some Oil-bearing Seeds Indigenons
to Queensland, 3 15
The Composition “of the Oil j
of Prickly Pear Seed 12
Sparasion australicum 93
x nigricora ae 93
Spheruterina punctata .. 76, 50, 84
Spiroptera meyastomum 82
Stephanops intermedius .. 73
Stephanoceros eichornii 71
Strigilla grossiana a 49
35 sincera 49
Syncheta ovalis 72
% stylata 72
tremula 72
Taphrocampa annulosa 72
Telenomus cegeus 124
«. ajdt: “a« on ~125
- bicolo? : 121
- diemensis Ae Ac 123
ewander Ae * 1238
Telenomus obliteratus
a ecleoides
rs e@clus
Terebra calata
y fenestrata
aA polygyrata
A subtextilis
af textilis
as turrita
Thelastomum alatum
Thylacoleo
Trematoda
Triartha longiseta
Trichoteleia acutiventris
argentipes
35 nigricincta
INDEX TO VOLUME XXVI.
Page
. 80,
.
122
122
121
53
53
53
53
53
Trimorus nigrellus
Triopthalmus dorsualis
Triphylus lacustris ae
Trochosphera cequatorialis
Trochus monile
Trophon pawe
iy recurrus
Turbo imperialis
;, militaris xe ate
Tweed Heads, N.S.W. Notes on
a plant-bearing common black
Opal from, ia 3 ate
Verticordia deshauesiana
Wallaao attu 5 ae 5
REXCKS
Page
129
DEVELOPMENT OF PETROLOGY DURING THE
PRESENT CENTURY.
(PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS).
By HENRY C. RICHARDS, M.Sc.,
Lecturer in Geology, University of Queensland.
Read at the Annual Meeting of the Royal Society
of Queensland, 30th March, 1914.
In 1857 the late Dr. H. C. Sorby communicated to the
Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. two very important papers em-
bodying the results of his investigations on the micro-
scopical structure of crystals, with particular reference to
the origin of minerals and rocks. Previous to this several
other investigators—Cordier, Bunsen, Durocher, Scrope, etc.,
had been investigating the origin of rocks, but the impetus
of Sorby’s work was particularly pronounced and has had
a very great influence.
Many factors have played a prominent part in the
recent advances in Petrology, but the development in physi-
cal-chemistry, the more intimate knowledge of the structure
of the earth’s crust, the accumulated knowledge of the dis-
tribution of rocks both in space and time, the perfection
of optical determinations, and a more intimate knowledge
of the specific properties of minerals, have very considerably
furthered our knowledge of the origin of rocks, their diversity
and genetic relationships.
In petrogenesis the dominating factor at the close
of the last century was, perhaps, differentiation, but the
application of the principles of solution to the crystalliza-
tion of igneous rock-magmas by Vogt and his determina-
tion of the approximate * eutectic ratios ** for a number
of pairs of minerals accounted for the theory of eutectics
playing the chief role for a few years.
The principles of differentiation, eutectics and the
absorption and assimilation of rock-matter by molten rock-
2 DEVELOPMENT OF PETROLOGY.
magmas now form the bases of the various hypotheses
put forward to account for the genesis and diversity of
igneous rocks.
During the present century there have been published
several works of an epoch making nature.
Amongst. the many important publications we find
notably : “The Quantitative Classification of the Igneous
Rock,’ by the four eminent American petrologists, Cross,
Iddings, Pirsson, and Washington; “ Die Silikatschmelz-
lésungen,’ by Vogt: a “* Treatise on Metamorphism,”
by Van Hise; ~*~ Die Krystallinen Schiefer,” by Gruben-
mann: ‘“ Natural History of Igneous Rocks,” by A.
Harker; and the various publications by R. A. Daly
dealing with his ‘‘ Overhead Stoping Theory” and ‘ Alka~
line Rocks”; by F. E. Wright on “Microscopic Petrography”’;
and by Day and others of the Carnegie Institute, Washing-
ton, on the physical properties of minerals.
For many years after the application of microscopic
methods to the study of rocks, a tremendous amount of
descriptive work was carried out and was ready for use
in the formation of the generalisations which have been
formulated during the present century.
Such has been the influence of the developments of
physical chemistry and the various factors enumerated
above, that petrology is now rapidly passing from a purely
descriptive into an inductive science.
Whitman Cross in his ““ Review of the Development of
Systematic Petrography in the Nineteenth Century,” sum-
marises the position at the close of that century as follows :
1. There is as yet no comprehensive and _ properly
systematic classification of all rocks.
2. Rocks of igneous origin have been much more
thoroughly investigated than others and they have received
correspondingly more definite and systematic classifi-
cation.
3. The rocks which have been formed on the surface,
of the earth by the destruction of older rocks may be viewed
from so many standpoints. ..... that no consistent
arrangement of these objects, deserving the name of a petro-
graphic system, has been proposed.
BY HENRY: C. RICHARDS, M.SC. 3
4. Metamorphic Rocks. ... ... . defy systematic treat-
ment at the present time.
The above may, be taken to fairly represent the posi-
tion at that period.
On all four points very great advances have been made
since that time; the systematic classification of rocks
is on a much sounder basis and the sedimentary and meta-
morphic rocks have been more closely studied, also
we find that as the result of the labours of many, but
particularly Van Hise and Grubenmann, metamorphic
rocks are now capable of fairly systematic treatment.
The year 1901 was not marked by any great develop-
ment. Dr. Teall in his Presidential Address to the Geo-
logical Society of London, dealt with the consolidation
of rocks from molten-magmas and their differentiation
into species. After discussing .these matters thoroughly
in the light of the most recent investigations, he concludes
thus: ~ The origin of petrographical species, so far as the
igneous rocks are concerned, is a problem the final solution
of which has been handed on by the nineteenth century to its
successor.”
The year 1902, however, saw the launching of the
“ Quantitative Classification of Igneous Rocks.” by Cross,
Iddings, Pirsson, and Washington.
This classification was an entirely new system for the
classification and nomenclature of igneous rocks. “It is
a chemico-mineralogical system based on its own principles
and is in nowise an attempt to reduce any one of the exist-
ing systems to a chemical basis, or to formulate any of them
in a chemical way.’ A new nomenclature was demanded
in this classification and all igneous rocks are classified
on a basis of their chemical composition.
It is essential for the use of this system of classifica-
tion to know the chemical composition of the rock, either
actually by chemical analysis, approximately so by physical
means, or by microscopic optical methods indicated by the
authors. a
This scheme of classification has been most ingeniously
worked out, and no doubt was the result of very great labour
on the part of the authors. While its adoption has not,
however, been universal, it is used to some extent by almost
4 DEVELOPMENT OF PETROLOGY.
all petrologists, and in many respects supplied a long felt
want.
The amount of criticism levelled at this scheme since
its inception has been considerable, and its adoption by
the Americans has been more pronounced than by others.
Petrologists have been seeking for a truly natural classifica-
tion of igneous rocks, and perhaps the main objection
to the American classification is that it is not a natural one.
The year 1903 was an important one, as several works
of great value were issued. Two important memoirs were
published by Vogt, of Christiania, “ Die Silikatschmelzl6-
sungen,” I. and II., and therein he gave his results of
certain experiments upon slags, and fused silicates, and
showed how the laws of solution may be applied to the
cyrstallization of igneous rock-magmas. The results of
researches by Doelter and Ebelmen were also availed of
by Vogt in his deductions. Vogt applied the principles
of physical chemistry with great success and acted in this
way :—Slags of rock-magmas are believed to be solutions ;
their constituents are known; one can therefore proceed
to experiment with their constituents and to predict the
behaviour of their mixture according to the principles
of physical chemistry.
Vogt made the first comprehensive attempt to apply
the principles of solutions to the crystallization of the
igneous rock-magmas and even for that alone Petrology
owes him a great deal.
In this year “A Treatise on Metamorphism,” by
C. R. Van Hise, was published as Monograph XLVII,
U.S. Geol. Survey. This is a treatise of monumental
proportions and is really an attempt to reduce the
phenomena of metamorphism to order under the principles
of physics and chemistry. Van Hise took seven years
in actually preparing this work and he advanced the know-
ledge of metamorphic rocks and the conditions of their
formation very extensively indeed.
The first of a series of papers by R. A. Daly on the
*“ Mechanics of Igneous Intrusion,’ was published in this
year. In this first paper Daly concluded that dykes, sheets,
laccolites, bysmaliths, and perhaps a few of the smaller
stock-like plutonic bodies are conceived to be due to crustal
BY HENRY C. RICHARDS, M.SC. o
displacement permitting intrusion; that marginal
assimilation in the preparation of subterranean magma
chambers is quite subordinate to magmatic overhead stop-
ing, and that abyssal assimilation, in contrast to marginal
(hybabyssal) is responsible for the preparation or notable
modifications of magmas whence come, through differentia-
tion, the igneous rocks of the globe.
We thus have the putting forward of Daly’s * Over-
head Stoping Theory,” which has met with fairly general
acceptance.
One other publication during the year which deserves
special notice is the “‘ Chemical Analyses of [Igneous Rocks,”’
by H. 8S. Washington and published as Prof. Paper 14
U.S. Geol. Survey. This work is a collection of analyses
published from 1884-1900 with a critical discussion of the
character and use of analyses. The value of this publica-
tion to petrographers and chemists has been very great
indeed, and although published ten years ago, it continues
to be used to a considerable extent.
After the specially rich year in 1903 we find rather
leaner times in 1904, 1905, 1906, in the productions of
works dealing in a general way with Petrology. ~*~ Die
Kristallinen Schiefer,”’ by U. Grubenmann, in 1907, was an
all important work. The author presented therein a highly
systematic treatment of the crystalline schists—some-
thing which had been sought after for a considerable time.
Grubenmann explained the characteristics of the
crystalline schists and their occurrence in the crust of the
earth, according to physico-chemical laws. He made a
threefold division of the crust of the earth and these three
zones in a general way correspond to Van Hise’s two zones.
He gave an exhaustive treatment of the effects in each
zone with their determining factors and divided up the rocks
into twelve groups. The work was a valuable contribu-
tion to our knowledge of metamorphic rocks, in that it
summarised the existing knowledge, added new material,
put forth a new theory, and set out a classification which
although recognised by the author as not a perfect system,
has proved of very great value.
In 1908 Dr. H. C. Sorby shortly before his death
presented to the Geol. Society of London, a highly important
6 DEVELOPMENT OF PETROLOGY.
memoir on the * Application of Quantitative Methods
to the Study of Rocks.” He applied experimental physics
to the study of various sedimentary and metamorphic
rocks and gave the results of many years experiment and
reflection. Like all scientific writings of this distinguished
author, it was marked by a great wealth of experimental
detail and showed the great bearing of accurate quantitative
methods on the study of these rocks. During this year,
R. A. Daly in the “Origin of Augite Andesite and of
related Ultra-basic Rocks,” strongly supported the early
views of Scrope, Darwin and others as to the efficiency of
fractional crystallization in the formation of igneous rocks,
and stated his belief that the syntectic (assimilation) theory
and the fractional crystallization theory were essential and
principal elements in the final solution of the genetic prob-
lem of the igneous rocks.
The publication of the “ Natural History of Igneous
Rocks,” by Alfred Harker, of the University of Cambridge,
in 1909, was: of great importance as the work was of an
epoch-making nature. Within the few years previous to its
publication, a great number of papers, making important
contributions to the science of petrology, had been written
and a work giving a systematic presentation of the exist-
ing knowledge on the subject was needed. Harker’s work
supplied this want and his lucid treatment of the subject
has made this publication a most popular one amongst
students of petrology.
Harker believed that a correlation exists between
the general geological history and igneous activity of a
given region, that igneous action is the result of crustal
movements, and that these movements produce magmatic
differentiation over continental areas, so that we have
magmas of different composition in regions affected by
different kinds of crustal movements.
Harker accepts the idea of differentiation and explains
petrological provinces as due to differentiation over large
areas, and the origin of different types within a given pro-
vince is also explained as due to differentiation.
Harker, in his final chapter speaks of the American
quantitative classification as marking “a _ retrograde
movement, for here the artificial element is applied to the
complete exclusion of the natural.”
BY HENRY C. RICHARDS, M.SC. d
While he does not consider the time yet ripe for a natural
classification of igneous rocks, along with Becker he be-
lieves that such a classification will be based upon the
eutectics occurring in the rocks; that the differentiation
of the various rock types from the single parent magma,
will be involved, and something similar to the principle
of descent used in the classification of animals and plants
will be developed. It is interesting to note that closely
following on Harker’s book, J. P. Iddings, of the University
of Chicago, brought out “Igneous Rocks,” Vol. I. In
many respects the treatment is the same as that of Harker,
particularly in those sections dealing with the newer pet-
rology, and Iddings, although differing from Harker on
the question of rock classification, agrees with him that
the existing systems ‘are unsystematic, unsatisfactory
and confusing.
Following up the question of rocks classification, we
find Cross, in 1910, in ** Natural Classification of Igneous
Rocks,” giving an excellent summary of the various classi-
fications suggested, and with criticisms of them, It is
in the main a defence of the Quantitative Classification
originated by himself and three other American petro-
logists in 1902. He does not subscribe to a classification
by eutectics as advocated by Becker and Vogt, owing to
its being extremely hypothetical and based on a part of
the rock at best. He also reviews the usual fundamental
objections to the systematic use of the factors of mineral
and textural characters. Cross states : “* It appears that a
natural classification of igneous rocks, expressing a relation
between their most notable chemical and physical pro-
perties and the origin of those properties in the
geological occurrence is impossible. The natural
history of the objects is too complex. The only
remaining basis for systematic classification is in the
characters of the objects themselves. The chemical, mineral
and textural characters of igneous rocks are each grada-
tional as regards several elements. No systematic division
can be made except along arbitrary or artificial lines, and
in this sense petrographic classification must be unnatural.”
Harker, however, believes we have already the gerne
of a natural system in a classification by eutectics.
8 DEVELOPMENT OF PETROLOGY.
On the question of Alkaline Rocks to which gradually
increasing importance has been attached, Daly furnished
during 1910 an interesting hypothesis with regard to their
origin. His hypothesis is that most of the alkaline species
are formed by the interaction of basaltic magma and lime-
stone.
This view as to the origin of alkaline rocks is still
in the hypothetical stage, and as far as Australian repre-
sentatives of these rocks are concerned, it has not been
very favourably received.
In the succeeding year, 1911, Daly in ‘“* Magmatic
Differentiation in Hawaii,” stated as his belief that ** all late
pre-Cambrian and younger * Alkaline’ rocks are the result
of differentiation within primary basaltic magma or within
syntectic magmas formed by the solution of solid, generally
sedimentary, rock in the primary basalt. The marvellously
uniform composition of the basaltic magma issuing from
countless fissures in every ocean basin, as in every conti-
nental plateau, seems capable of explanation only on the
premise that it forms the material of a continuous world-
circling substratum. The facts of geology suggest that
this substratum was formed by an ancient liquidation
which took place when the globe was molten at the surface.”
He also holds that the division of igneous rocks into.
* Atlantic’’ and * Pacific” groups as suggested by Becke
and so strongly advocated by Harker, is not warranted.
On this latter question Cross, Iddings, and others are with
Daly.
In the “ Origin of Igneous Rocks” (1911) by F-
Loewinson-Lessing we find a modification of the ideas.
which were held by Bunsen and Michel Lévy.
The author concludes that there are two original
independent magmas and that these predominate in the
earth’s crust. These two primordial magmas are the
granitic and gabbroidal (basaltic) and all other igneous
rocks are derivations from them and subordinate to
them in their occurrence. All igneous rocks belong to-
those types: (1) primordial magmas; (2) rocks due to
differentiation ; (3) rocks produced by a mingling of the
two magmas. In addition, all igneous rocks of all geo-
logical periods originated principally by the refusion of
BY HENRY C. RICHARDS, M.SC 8)
the earth’s crust, so that we meet in successive periods the
same types of rocks.
It is not generally conceded that Loewinson-Lessing
was justified in coming to the above conclusions on the
available evidence.
“The Methods of Petro-Microscopic Research,” by
F. E. Wright, which was published by the Carnegie Institu-
tion in 1911, was a most important contribution. Wright
justly states in petrology: “The quality of our quantitative
work is far more important than the quantity of our qualita-
tive work,’ and his publication is one which certainly
makes for increased efficiency in quantitative work.
An interesting paper by L. L. Fermor, in 1912, on the
Systematic Position of the Kodurite Series’ in India,
discloses a novel idea in the use of garnet as a geological
barometer.
Kodurite when classified according to the American
classification, gives a norm of Orthoclase, Leucite, Apatite,
Anorthite, Hedenbergite, Wollastonite, Tephroite, and
Magnetite. The Mode is Orthoclase, a manganese garnet
known as Spandite, and Apatite. Comparison of the specific
gravities of the norm and mode of this rock showed that
the garnetiferous form (the mode) was of a considerably
higher specific gravity and consequently occupied a con-
siderably smaller volume (10 per cent. less) than the non-
garnetiferous form (the norm). Fermor, therefore, con-
cluded that Kodurite must have been formed under con-
siderable pressure and that below a certain depth all the
ferro-magnesian minerals, such as pyroxene, amphibole,
olivine, and biotite with anorthite have arranged them-
selves as far as possible into garnets, for thereby the maximum
reduction in volume and absorption of heat is effected.
Fermor then goes on to suggest that beneath the rocks
now known as plutonic, there must be a zone of garnetiferous
rocks extending downwards in a plastic solid form as far
as the presumed metallic core of the earth. For this zone
he proposes the term ‘ Infra-Plutonic.”
Fermor’s publication is very interesting and his con-
clusions ingenious, but in view of the occurrence of garnet
in certain limestone contact-rocks, etc., it would be better
perhaps to regard certain other minerals of high specific
10 DEVELOPMENT OF PETROLOGY.
gravity and highly endothermic character in their forma-
tion under pressure, as being more characteristic of the
‘* infra-plutonic zone” than garnet.
Within the last few months *: [Igneous Rocks,” Vol. [1.,
by J. P. Iddings, has been published. It is interesting
to note that the classification of rock-groups is based
mainly on the old ~ qualitative ~~ system and not on the
* American Classification ~ of which Iddings is one of the
founders.
CONCLUSION.
An attempt has been made to deal with the various
advances made in petrology during the last thirteen years.
Owing to the great number of publications bearing on this
question, and the difficulty of obtaining them here, it is
felt that this review cannot be other than incomplete ;
but it is hoped that at least the main developments have
been chronicled. With regard to the classifications of
igneous rocks in vogue at present, those based upon (a)
mineral (or chemical) composition and (b) texture or
geologic mode of occurrence are perhaps the most satis-
factory. It is hoped that as our knowledge becomes more
complete classifications may be based on the principles
of eutectics and the methods of genesis of igneous -types.
The main objections to the existing American Classifi-
cation are that it can not be used without a fairly intimate
knowledge of the chemical composition of the rock, and it
usually replaces the actual mineral composition by an im-
aginary mineral composition (the norm). On the other
hand it has proved of very great service in revealing
chemical characteristics and relationships.
There has been a great deal of controversy on the
* Relations between tectonic and _ petrographical facies,”
as Harker terms it. Harker concludes that ‘‘as regards
the younger igneous rocks, the main alkaline and calcic
regions correspond to the areas characterised by the Atlantic
and Pacific types of the coastline respectively.” and holds
that the alkaline rocks are typically. associated with sub-
sidence due to radial contraction of the globe, and the
caleic rocks with folding due to lateral compression.
Cross and others, however, hold that whether the relation-
ship involved, is true or not, it is not responsible for the
BY HENRY C. RICHARDS, M.SC. 11
chemical differences of the magmatic series ; nor does it
appear that the generalization of distribution applies to
the older rocks.
Several other authors have expressed their views on
the origin of Alkaline Rocks. Becke suggested that during
a gaseous stage of the earth the action of gravity separated
the magma into an upper, subalkaline or calcic, layer and
a lower, alkaline, layer.
Jensen suggested “that alkaline rocks are derived
from Archzean saline beds, which by chemical attacks on
the adjacent sediments, have given rise to an alkaline magma
in the process of metamorphosis. This magma has been
squeezed laterally into continental areas and has undergone
differentiation, or it has mixed with other magmas, chiefly
basic, and then differentiated.
The views of Harker and Daly have already been given.
C.H. Smyth, Junr. however, suggests that alkaline rocks
are derived from ordinary subalkaline magmas through the
agency of mineralisers.
The present position with respect to Metamorphic rocks
is that two of the fundamental problems of the origin of
crystalline schists are now settled, viz., the source of the
erystalline rocks and their relation to time. It is generally
accepted that they have been developed from both igneous
and sedimentary rocks in various periods and not in
Archean times alone as previously supposed. There are.
two divergent views, however, as to the mode of origin ;
(1) that the processes of development are devoid of the
agency of igneous rocks; (2) that the agency of igneous rocks
is the controlling factor.
THE COMPOSITION OF THE OIL OF PRICKLY-
PEAR SEED (Opuntia spp.)
By FRANK SMITH, BSc., F.1.C., and
L. A. MESTON.
{Read hefore the Royal Society of Queensland, 27th April,
1914.)
THE SEED.
OPUNTIA species, the prickly-pear of America and
Australia, bear considerable quantities of fruit of more or
jess edible quality and containing proportion of seed varying
in varieties examined in America from 5 to 9 per cent. by
weight of the edible pulp. In Queensland varieties exaiined
the seed has been found to comprise 6 to 11 per cent. of
the fruit.*
The seeds are distributed throughout the mass of the
pulp. They are somewhat disc-shaped and are from
one-eighth to three-sixteenths of an inch in diameter.
The seed coats are very hard and would be extremely
difficult of mastication and digestion by herbivora.
On analysis the seed were found to have the follow-
ing compositiony :—
Moisture a6 as as an 2.47 per cent.
Protein are Ae - ae 4.65 per cent.
Woody Fibre (K6nig) ae ac 39.77 per cent.
Oil aye ae Sb 7.12 per cent.
Ash 3% oe 5. Be 3.29 per cent.
Other Carbohydrates 46 Re 42.70 per cent.
Other samples of seed were found by the authors to
contain from 6-8 per cent. of oil.
* Report of the Agricultural Chemist for 1912-1913.
+ By permission of the Agricultural Chemist.
BY FRANK SMITH, B.SC., F.1.C., AND L. A. MESTON, 13
THE OIL.
It is difficult to form any estimate of the amount of
oil produced by prickly-pear in bearing. It is urged, how-
ever, that the oil from the low percentage present in the
seed. and on account of the nature and mode of distri-
bution of the latter, can have no commercial value. and the
present communication must be viewed merely in the light
of a contribution to the chemistry of opuntia spp.
For the purpose of investigation a quantity of prickly-
pear seed was collected for us by Dr. Jean White, of the
Dulacca Prickly Pear Experiment Station, to whom our
thanks are due. The oil was removed by petroleum spirit
and the solvent removed by evaporation, finally in a brisk
stream of carbon dioxide.
The oil is of a clear amber colour. and on examina-
tion was found to have the following constants :—
Sper ati lo fib, ee is “ah ae .9242
Refraction (Zeiss at 20° C.) < . 74.8
(Abbe at 20° C.) Be re 1.475
(Oleor at, 22°) 3. zt ae +26
Acid Value .. si Be = 2.8
Saponification Value es A se 187.5
Todine Value (Hiibl) ws ae ae 130
Bromine-thermal Value 4 as = 24?
Hehner Value oN sé #3 s 94.9
Reichert-Meissl Value a5 - > 4
THE Fatty Acrps.
The mixed fatty acids were found to have an iodine
value of 133, and a neutralisation value of 201. The mean
molecular weight is 279.
The liquid and solid acids composing the mixed fatty
acids were separated by the usual method of taking advant-
age of the different solubilities of their lead-salts in ether.
The mixed fatty acids consist approximately of (1)
83 per cent liquid acids ; (2) 17 per cent. of solid acids.
THE Liquip Fatty Acrps.
The iodine value of the liquid acids was found to be
136, and the mean molecular weight 283. The oxidation
products by the alkaline permanganate method of Hazura
and Griissner were examined. Typical crystals of dioxy-
stearic acid, melting at 130° C., and crystals of an isomer
of sativic acid (tetroxystearic acid), M.Pt. 156-159° C.
14 COMPOSITION OF THE OIL OF PRICKLY-PEAR SEED.
were obtained, but no product that could be identified
with linusic acid (hexahydroxystearic acid). Examina-
tion of the oil for linolenic esters by the bromination pro-
cess vielded a negligible amount of hexabromide.
Accordingly the liquid fatty acids of prickly-pear
seed oil consist of a mixture of oleic and linoleic acids.
THE Soxip Farry Acips.
The solid fatty acids were obtained as a yellowish
cake (M.Pt. 50-53° C.). The mean molecular weight was
determined as 259, hence it was assumed that the solid
acids consist almost entirely of palmitic acid. On purifica-
tion by crystallisation from alcohol fractions with melting
points from 58° to 61.5° C., were obtained. (M.Pt. of
palmitic acid: 62.6° ©.). A small fraction difficultly
soluble in alcohol, and separating in white flocks, was also
obtained. It melted from 78° C. to 82° C, was evidently
a mixture, and probably consists mainly of lignoceric acid.
SUMMARY.
1. The oil of prickly-pear seed is of the class of semi-
drying oils.
2. It is composed of glycerides of oleic, linoleic, and
palmitic acids, with probably a small percentage of the
givceride of lignoceric acid.
SOME OLL-BEARING SEEDS INDIGENOUS TO
QUEENSLAND.
By FRANK SMITH, B.8c., F.1.C.,, and
L. A. MESTON.
(Read before the Royal Society of Queensland, 27th April,
1914.)
I.—THE SEED OF MACADAMIA TERNIFOLIA
AND [TS OIL.
MACADAMIA TERNIFOLIA (F. v. M.) (N. O. Proteacae),
the Queensland Nut, the nut tree of sub-tropical Eastern
Australia, is of common occurrence in the northern brush-
forests of New South Wales and the coastal scrubs of South-
ern Queensland.
It is a tall, evergreen tree, bearing dark green, d_nse
foliage, attaining a height of sixty feet, and is remarkable
in that its foliage is rich in cyanogenetic glucoside.
Greshoff* in specimens propagated at Kew, obtained
] per cent of hydrocyanic acid from the green leaves. One
of us (F. Smith) has found .05 per cent. of hydrocyanic
acid in leaves collected during the winter months. Petrie
has observed the occurrence of hydrocyanic acid in both
varieties distinguished by Maiden, viz.: M._ ternifolia
and M. ternifolia var. integrifolia. The trees come
into bearing during the winter, producing when mature
a fair crop. The fruit hangs in racemes, and consists
of a two valved coriaceous exocarp enclosing a_ slightly
roughened and shiny endocarp containing a single globular
seed.
THe Not.
The nut has an average weight of 4.8 grammes and
is composed of approximately 75 per cent. shell and 25
per cent. kernel. The shell is hard and brittle and from
* Kew Bulletin, No. 10, 1909.
+ Proc. Linnean Soc. N.S.W., 1912, Vol. 37, Part L., p. 220.
16 OIL-BEARING SEEDS INDIGENOUS TO QUEENSLAND.
one-sixteenth to one-eighth inch in thickness. The kerne}
is oily and of pleasant nutty flavour, reminiscent of the
chestnut. W. J. Allen (Agric.: Gaz. of N.S.W., XVI.,
1905, 1028), describes it as one of the best flavoured nuts,
finding in New South Wales, where is has been cultivated
to a slight extent, a ready market at sixpence to seven-
pence per pound. Analysis of the kernel showed it to have
the following composition which is compared with that of
almonds. ;
Queensland Nut. Almond
Mixture at «. o- per cent. 4.8 per cent.
Protein 3 +. 0.0 per cent: 20.0 per cent.
Ok oe .. 66.0 per cent. 54.9 per cent.
Carbohydrates .. 15.4 per cent. 17.3 per cent.
Crude Fibre -. 96. per cent. 2.0 per cent.
shies as -. 1.7 per cent. 2.0 per cent.
The Queensland Nut-contains less protein, but a larger
percentage of oil and of fibre than do almond kernels.
The kernels are starch free, contain 5.68 per cent.
of non-reducing sugar, and are free from cyanogenetic
clucoside,
THE OIL.
A quantity of ground kernels were extracted with low
boiling point petroleum ether, and the solvent evaporated
finally in a stream of warm dry carbon dioxide.
The pale, clear, yellowish oil was found to have the
following constants :—
Sp. grav. 15°-15° C. 23 iE 9162 per cent.
(Refraction Zeiss at 20° C.) oe 61.0 per cent.
(Abbe at 20° C.) Fae 1.466 per cent.
(Oleo at 22° C.) é. —.7 per cent.
Acid Value ae a3 ae sk per cent.
Saponification Value # o 194.5 per cent
Iodine Value 3c 68.0
Hehner Value BE a 95.9
Reichert-Meissl| Value .. 30 6
The oil is of the non-drying class, possessing lower
iodine value than the common vegetable edible oils, as
almond and olive oils.
THe INsoLuBLE Fatty Acips, comprising 95.9 per
cent of the oil, were found to have an iodine value of 73.0,
and a mean molecular weight of 275.9.
Separation of the liquid and solid acids by the lead-
salt-ether method yielded approximately (1) 75 per cent.
liquid acids, and (2) 25 per cent. solid acids.
BY FRANK SMITH, B.SC., F.I.C., AND L. A. MESTON. 17
THE Ligurp Farry Actps were found to have a mean
molecular weight of 277.0. The iodine value is 84.0. We
conclude that the unsaturated acid of Queensland nut
oil is wholly oleic acid.
The mean molecular weight and iodine value obtained
are, however, considerably lower than the value for pure
oleic acid (282 and 90), an indication of the presence of a
saturated acid of lower molecular weight.*
THE Souip Fatty Acrps were obtained as a white
cake melting at 54° C. They were found to have a mean
molecular weight of 273.0 Fractional crystallisation
from alcohol gave in order of solubility fractions melting
as under.
(1) 50° C,-55° C., a mixture, containing also proportion of unsat-
urated acid
(2) 56° C. -58° C., principally palmitic acid.
(3) 62° C.. pure palmitic acid.
(4) 69.5° C., pure stearic acid.
From the lithium salts prepared from the fraction of
lowest melting point was obtained by appropriate treat-
ment of alcohol a small portion of salt yielding on
decomposition with mineral acid, crystalline acid melting
at 51° C. The melting point of myristic acid (Mol. Wt.
228) is 53° C. Myristic acid is probably present and may
also occur in some quantity in the liquid fatty acids prepared
by the lead-salt-ether process.
SUMMARY.
(1) The nut of Macadamia ternifolia compares favour-
ably in composition with that of edible nuts. such as the
almond.
(2) It contains 66 per cent. of an edible non-drying
oil of low iodine value, and comparatively high content of
olyceride of saturated fatty acids.
(3) The oil is composed of glycerides of oleic, palmitic
and stearic acids, with some proportion of glyceride of myristic
acid.
We desire to acknowledge our indebtedness to the
chiefs of the Government Laboratories, Brisbane, for
facilities for the carrying out the present and preceding
investigation on the composition of prickly-pear seed oil.
* The lead-salt-ether method does not aftect the absolute separation
of unsaturated and saturated acid.
NOTES ON A) PLANT-BEARING COMMON BLACK
OPAL FROM TWEED HEADS, N.S.W.
By ERNEST W. SKEATS, D.Sc., A.R.C.S., F.G.S.
(Professor of Geology and Mineralogy, University of
Melbourne.)
( Read before the Royal Soevety of Queensland, April 27th,
1914.)
INTRODUCTION.
ABouT two years ago, Mr. H. ©. Richards, M.Sc.,
Lecturer in Geology at the University of Queensland,
sent me some fragments of a dense black, hard material,
which he found associated with the basalt flows of Tweed
Heads, New South Wales. Mr. Richards quite naturally,
from its appearance and occurrence, described it to me as
tachylyte, and as forming the glassy selvage to a basic
lava flow. I concurred in the indentification, but at the
time had no occasion to test it critically. Towards the
end of the year 1912, however, I had occasion to determine
its specific gravity, and that of some tachylytes from
Victoria and elsewhere. To my surprise I found that it
differed entirely in its properties from tachylyte.
GEOLOGICAL OCCURRENCE.
The mode of occurrence of the material will be sees.
from the sketch section, from information kindly supplied
by Mr. Richards. The basalt of Tweed Heads was the
subject of a short note by Mr. E. C. Andrews, B.A., in the
bY ERNEST W. SKEATS, D.SC., A.R.C.S., F.G.S. 19
Annual Report of the Department of Mines, New South
Wales, 1904, pp. 145-146.
+++
pt a _
id LOWER BASALT. Upper BASALT. ComMMON BLACK OPAL.
N
;
SKETCH SECTION showing occurrence of Common Black Opal
between the two flows of Basalt at Point Danger. Vertical and Horizontal
Seale 200 feet to one inch.
Mr. Andrews described the basalt as of Tertiary age,
resting on a denuded surface of (?) Carboniferous rocks
nearly at sea level... As basalts of Jura-Trias age are known
from adjoining areas, the precise age of the Tweed Heads
basalt is, perhaps, to some extent, an open question. Mr.
Andrews’ description and section show only one flow of
basalt. Mr. Richards, however, who is working at the
geology of that area, tells me (see section) that two flows
occur; that certain depressions probably formed by
erosion occur on the surface of the older flow, and that
the occurrence of the black material appears to be restricted
to these hollows. The later flow sealed them up and they
have been recently exposed during quarrying operations.
The quarries occur near Point Danger and about 100 yards
south of the Queensland border.
IDENTIFICATION OF THE MATERIAL.
SPECIFIC GRAVITY. Two determinations with a
Walker’s steel yard gave values of 2.07 and 2.09. The
specific gravity of the tachylyte from the Merri Creek,
near Melbourne, is 2.74, the normal value for a glassy basic
rock. Th» specific gravity of opal ranges from 1.9 t9 2.3
Microscopic CHARACTERS.
Five rock sections have been prepared, one of which
20 PLANT-BEARING COMMON BLACK OPAL. 5
was left uncovered, so that the refractive index of the
material could be determined against various oils.
The refractive index of the material was found to be
very low, lower indeed than that of any known rock.
It was found to have almost the same refractive index
as that of chloroform, namely 1.45. The refractive index
of tachylyte was found to be considerably above 1.53.
In thin sections the material is a brownish-red colour,
contains, in places, rounded or irregular concretions of
pyrite, and is completely isotropic except for minute grains
of quartz and possibly felspar embedded in it. In contains
no microlites.
CHEMICAL CHARACTERS.
Blowpipe tests showed the abundance of silica by the
residue or skeleton left in a bead of microcosmic salt :
in the closed tube much water was condensed on heating,
strong reactions of sulphur were obtained on a silver coin
and the residue, after heating, being magnetic, indicated
the presence of iron. It will be noticed that all the physical
characters, such as specific gravity, refractive index and
isotropism, as well as the chemical characters, agree with
those of the mineral common opal. The colour and lustre
of the material are, however, unusual. It is dense, dull
black in colour, with a pitch-like lustre and a notable
conchoidal fracture. The occurrence of irregular masses
of nodules of common opal, associated with volcanic rocks,
such as trachytes and basalts is, of course, not uncommon,
but such as I have seen have been either creamy white,
yellow, brown, or greenish in colour. The black opal
is interesting also from the fact that it is crowded with frag-
ments of fossil plants.
FossILIFEROUS CHARACTERS.
Several thin sections of the black opal were made
and examined. It was at once noticed that these sections
were largely composed of the remains of plants or rather cell
structure of vegetable origin The plant material was very
much broken up and disintegrated as a reference to the
photomicrographs, Plate I, figs 1 and 2, and Plate II.,
fig. 1, will show.
BY ERNEST W. SKEATS, D.SC., A.R.C.S., F.G.S. 21
Professor Ewart kindly examined the sections for me.
He found the material generally too fragmentary for pre-
cise determination, but noted the presence of sieve tubes,
cork cells, epidermis with cuticle, and in one place, part
of the woody tissue of a plant, probably a transverse sec-
tion of scalariform tracheids. Some of the structures
appeared to represent sections of fresh water algze, others
of various plants, including the spore of a fungus, a trans-
verse section of a leaf and, possibly, a section of a small
petiole. There was a remarkable paucity of woody tissue
represented in the sections.
In one of two places rounded or oval cellular areas
occur consisting of silica which now affects polarized light.
Their size and the character of their siliceous network
suggest that they may be altered radiolaria.
Perhaps the most interesting organism is seen in Plate IT,
fig. 2. It consists of an oblique section through an append-
age of one of the arthropoda and may __ represent
the section of a leg of a fossil spider. The minute hairs
projecting from the surface of the appendage are clearly
noticeable in the photomicrograph. In New South Wales,
Victoria, and elsewhere, some deposits of common
opal are found to contain abundant skeletons of the siliceous
frustules of the diatomaceae, and close search for diatoms
has been made of the thin sections from this deposit,
but with entirely negative results.
Mover oF FORMATION OF THE DEPOSIT.
Reference to the sketch geological section, fig. 1, shows
that the black opal occurs in shallow depressions in the
surface of the basaltic flow which has been subsequently
covered with a younger flow. It would appear that in
the time interval between the two lava flows, erosion of
the earlier flow produced slight depressions which became
swampy. Plants growing near the depressed areas con-
tributed leaves to the deposit, while fresh water plants grew
and accumulated in the swampy depressions. The
mechanism by which the material was converted into opal,
cannot be clearly pictured, but it is possible that thermal
waters stimulated by proximity to an active volcanic centre,
22 PLANT-BEARING COMMON BLACK OPAL.
dissolved silica from rocks through which the water passed
and that this silica and some of the water was depositec
in depressions in the form of common black opal.
EXPLANATION OF PLATES.
PLATE I.
Fig. 1.—Photomicrograph of section of Common Black Opal, Tweed
Heads, New South Wales, showing fragments of plants, and an elliptical
section possibly radiolarian, in a ground mass of opal. » 14 diameters,
ordinary light.
Fig. 2.—Photomicrograph of section of Common Blaek Opal, Tweed
Heads, New South Wales. Section showing plant remains in matrix of
light brown coloured opal. » 120 diameters, ordinary light.
Puate IL.
Fig. 1.—Photomicrograph of section of Common Black Opal, Tweed
Heads, New South Wales. The cell structure of a plant adjoins a crack in
centre of section. X 120 diameters, ordinary light.
Fig. 2.—Photomicrograph of section of Common Black Opal, Tweed
Heads, New South Wales. In the centre of the field is an oblique section”
of leg of an arthropod which may be a spider. Surrounding it are plant
fragments and concretions of pyrite, in a matrix of brown opal.
x 120 diameters, ordinary light.
PuatTeE IL.
Proc. Roy. Soc. Q’LAND, Vol. xxvI.
14.
Aw
Fig 1.
120
2.
Fie
a
‘
Proc. Roy. Soc. Q’LAND, Vol. xxvI. PratE If.
et
t
eg ’ ; f ~ Aes
is i . 7 £& xt
= A * * - q
Fou = : “ ; - 4
A ft i@ =2 ss 3 * 5 i ‘awe
4 =—/# y Me ’ ae
5 es , 7 a 7
4 Ps “<7 =
~ + ' Ls a = ry i j
: i | i a) i . .
:) =| rd " 5 wh
‘ : f; a . a
= a F a | . :
J rf * ‘ = }
66 - ‘ .«
i : 7 r ais .
ns :
- res ’ :
Kite a
i = ; B ” * vgs : (ts ,
t * - ~ .
y is +. ‘ es]
‘ ee = y se ’
+ if = i> E
t H f, i id -
( AY,
: ‘ 3 . : 3 :
x 4 ao = = a
: ay = ig | ae ¥
i B : ; = oie ee eae buts
p * “, 4 Nn =f } i a7 . ;
: uy : =e
i ; Guns s x ;
% . ‘ary 4 - 7 ‘
‘ a rs. not eld St - e, m
- : r = a =
‘ of 3 ees, + / o a . ©
' - eye Hee Y mag Ma)
1 A iy ? Ce 7 f at ie : '
‘ P
2 a : ie: -
a ; ; g ay
‘ ry 4 bs “e : q 7 a = ’ ; ¥
5 a rs ‘ r , .
7 ri Py if Ny F 5
\ \ pean a 4 a
i p — ‘
‘ ; t % ee ae: 2
es '
5 ; 4
. : , at
7 i ) + + i
, ‘ 4
5 \ } ier
’ a i M \ Lery
‘i ts 4 \ ——
ny
— f ~ g¢ i
RADIOGENESIS IN) EVOLUTION.
By HEBER A. LONGMAN.
(QUEENSLAND MUSEUM).
( Read before the Royal Society of Queensland, May 25, 1914)
THE somewhat ponderous title heading this paper re-
quires alittle explanation. For some time past the writer has
been engaged in a kind of stock-taking of such literature
on Evolution as has been available for purposes of study.
And with this stock-taking, and the putting into shape
of a numerous collection of notes, there has seemed to be
a personal need for a re-setting of views and an elaboration
of old aspects. Probably many persons who are more or
less conversant with modern evolutionary literature have
been at times puzzled by conflicting theories, and have
felt a similar need to attempt to gauge the _ present
position. Thus there may be some utility in putting these
notes on record, even though the actual merit of originality
be very slight. The Evolution of thirty years ago is not
the Evolution of to-day. The impetus given by the work
of the great Darwin to many of his contemporaries was
responsible for a wealth of literature and research records,
much of which is of the greatest value: but with this,
there has been a tendency on the part of a few to dogmatic
utterances, and also an enthusiasm which sometimes puts
theorising far in advance of facts. Both as to the processes
and the dynamics of Evolution, assertions have been made
which are very inadequate, and, in some cases, quite
incorrect in the light of fuller knowledge. Numerous
theories, some of which are comparatively modern, have
24 RADIOGENESIS IN EVOLUTION.
been established around the facts of variation. Through
studying these, Radiogenesis Game to mind as a suggestive
term for epitomising certain complex phenomena. In some
respects it escapes many of the objections which have been
raised against the commonly-used Orthogenesis, and it
has the advantage, to my mind, of not bearing so definite
a teleological interpretation. Hence the title of this
paper. And as it is obviously impossible to isolate one
phase of Evolution, the writer feels that no apology is
needed for touching, even though very casually, on other
points.
In some quarters there is a tendency, which is by no
means new, to postulate universal laws as the result of a
few experiments and observations. In several instances
this is doubtless justifiable, but it is becoming more and
more apparent that generalisations which may seem to
govern certain sets of phenomena may not be arbitrarily
applied as laws throughout the realm of nature. In
science, as in politics and other schools of life, loyalty to
an attitude or a theory tends sometimes to develop a species
of dogmatism which, occasionally, creates strenuous
controversies.
Many instances may here be given. Let us take first
the unceasing discussion of the inheritance of acquired
characteristics. Weismann distinguishes acquired character-
istics as somatogenic, denoting that such arise
only through special influences affecting the body or
individual parts of it: in contradistinction to these are
blastogenic characteristics which originate solely in the
primary constituents of the germ. With Wallace, Ray
Lankester, J. Arthur Thomson and others, he holds that
acquired characteristics, as so defined, cannot be trans-
mitted to offspring, and so far as negative evidence goes,
the position is a strong one. Lankester, it should be noted,
believes in the transmittance of what he suggestively terms
‘educability,”* and thus his attitude is somewhat
qualified. The Neo-Lamarckian school strongly criticises
the view that acquired characteristics are not transmitted,
and Haeckel firmly supports them here. Dendy has also
*Pres, Address, Brit. Association, York, 1906.
BY HEBER A LONGMAN. 25
pointed out ~ that it is not difficult to imagine a mechanisin
by which somatogenic characters may gradually be
converted into blastogenic ones, and if this is in any way
possible, there is no reason why we should deny the possi-
bility of their inheritance.’’* And he associates with his
remarks experiments which seem to point conclusively
to the inheritance of acquired characters. Although in
the great majority of experiments, mutilations are in no
way transmitted, yet there are several notable cases which
call for comment. Prof. Eugene W. Hilgard, of the Univer-
sity of California, records the case of a cat which sustained
a compound fracture of her tail which caused a marked
displacement: this peculiarity was noted in some of her
offspring, and was aggravated by inbreeding and artificial
selection until a race of cats with crooked tails was
established.+ The ecaudate condition of the famous
Manxian felines has somehow to be accounted for, and it
is rather difficult to imagine how such a trait could be
of a strictly blastogenic origin. Several cases of transmitted
deformities (caused by accidents) in human beings have
been placed on record, but space forbids their recapitulation
here. Apparently, there is no hard and fast criterion
as to the susceptibility of organs, or organisms, and, whilst
the majority are rigid, some are easily perturbed.
ay
G. Archdall Reid claims that no logical distinction
can be made between “acquired” and “inborn”
characteristics. He asserts that there are invariably two
factors concerned in all development—nature and nurture,
and that all the individual inherits is a bundle of potentialities
to grow this way and that in response to this stimulus
or that. “ His nature is the sum of his potentialities ;
his nurture is the sum of the influences that play on him,
and convert his potentialities into actualities. Bats
if any character is an acquirement, all characters are
acquirements.”’= So states the Chesterton of modern
science.
A brief review of literature dealing with the Mendelian
theory also shows the incongruity of trying to establish
* Outlines of Evolutionary Biology,” p. 404.
+ Vide Cope, “* Primary Factors of Organic Evolution,” p. 432 (1896).
i Bedrock,” January, 1914.
Cc
26 RADIOGENESIS IN EVOLUTION.
a set of universal laws. Karl Pearson,* G. Archdall Reid+
and others have pointed out that in certain demonstrable
cases, Mendelian laws are contradicted or superseded,
and even the acceptance of what modern Mendelians call
“independent inheritance.’’ does not solve the question.
Elsewhere, | have ventured to summarise my impressions
as follow :—~ The supposed universality of the Mendelic
principle has been largely suggested by focussing attention
on certain points and ignoring others. Heredity is more
often a complex synthesis than a mosaic of dominants>
and recessives.”’= It must be added that several writers,
amongst whom may be noted E. C. MacDowell.** have
endeavoured to interpret blended inheritance on Mendelian
lines by ~*~ multiple factors.” But whatever views are
expressed as to the range of the Mendelian laws, there can
be no question that some of the most valuable work on
heredity during recent years has been the result of
investigators who have sought to establish this theory.
The accumulation of facts is of the utmost value, even
though theories which stimulated the workers who place
facts on record may have to be qualified.
The majority of writers do not now dogmatise on the
* all-sufficiency ’’ of natural selection. Even the query
as to the evolution of structure preceding the evolution of
function cannot always be answered in the affirmative.
Nowadays, it is not so much a case of putting the views
of Darwin against those of Lamarck, but of associating
the two, and laying the major stress on natural selection.
Instances are given of processes which cannot be wholly
explained by natural selection. Speaking on ~ By-products
of Evolution,’ Dendy,7+ points out that natural selection
cannot be directly responsible for the minute differences
of the spicules of sponges, as these cannot be of importance
in the soft tissues of the sponge. Yet these minute spicules
exhibit constant specific characters. Possibly, they are
subject to an indirect control through being co-related to
** Qn a Gencralized Theory of Alternative Inheritance, with special
reference to Mendel’s Laws,” (1904).
+ © Bedrock,” July, 1913, p. 232.
tPres. Address, Qld. Field Naturalists’ Club, 1914.
** Jour. Exper. Zoology. Vol. XVI., No. 2, pp. 177-194, 1914.
+1TPres. Address, Quekett Wicroscopical Club, 1913.
BY HEBER A. LONGMAN. 27
other adaptive characters. Under the principle of natural
selection, we may understand that it is an advantage for
certain skink and gecko lizards to be able to lose their
tails, but can we explain by the same process the power
of regenerating them? It is difficult to diagnose the
actual origin of an organ, say, the limb of a vertebrate,
though once the limbs are there we can conceive a selective
process to modifications. We can comprehend that a
paddle has been independently evolved in turtles, penguins,
ichthyosaurs, seals and whales. Many naturalists assert
that minute variations, especially in their initial stages,
could not have a survival value. A partial explanation
is Darwin’s view of co-related variations. But actual facts
of variation greatly worried Darwin. As he quaintly
expressed himself when writing to Huxley :— If, as I
think, external conditions produce little direct effect. what
the devil determines each particular variation 2 ’
Writing of some cases of mimicry, R. H. Lock says,
the brain reels before the task of picturing the gradual
building-up of such a resemblance by the successive
additions of small differences, each one useful to the poss-
essor of it.’’*
We naturally look here to the Mutationists for informa-
tion and help. The principles associated by De Vries
with his well-known examples of mutation have recently
been subjected to much criticism. Several authorities
assert that the mutations noted of the Evening Primrose
(Enothera lamarckiana) were in reality due to an ancestral
natural hybridism. The Onagracez are evidently far more
susceptible to hybridising than most other orders. Prof.
E. C. Jeffrey, of Harvard University, even goes so far as
to say that the mutation theory “may apparently be
now relegated to the limbo of discarded hypotheses.’’+
But this is an unwarrantable dictum. Hybridism may
be often associated with mutations, but it would be
exceedingly difficult to explain all mutations—especially,
as we shall see, those noted by palaeontologists—in this
way. There has been no mere repetition of ‘ repertoire
‘
** Variation, Heredity and Evolution,” p. :
+‘ Science,” April 3rd, 1914.
28 RADIOGENESIS IN EVOLUTION.
patterns "’ (to use the term applied by A. Bacot}. The
actual facts of mutation are too big for that.
Ample evidence has been provided by Bateson,* that
even specific distinctions frequently arise as single
variations. Nature leaps as well as creeps. Thus certain
meristic variations—or variations in symmetry and the
number of organs—may be frequently. noted, and many
of these cannot develop through intermediate stages.
Thus, plants with a four-fold arrangement may jump to a
perfectly-developed five-fold form. Bateson also lays
stress on what he terms Homeoeosis, or the variation
established when one organ takes on the character of
another organ, such as a disc floret of a composite flower
appearing in the likeness of a ray. Whatever may be
the opinion as to the operation of natural selection on
infinitesimal variations, there can be no question as to its
inevitable effects, preserving or exterminating, great steps
or mutations. The non-viable forms are ruthlessly stamped
out, and the fittest survive.
Asa Gray believed that *‘ variation has been led along
certain beneficial lines.”’ To this and similar views the
name of Orthogenesis has been given. ‘This term implies
a guiding principle in variations, suggesting a proceeding
along certain definite lines. Plate uses the term
éctogenesis, or ectogenetic orthogenesis, for “ definitely
directed variation.” Naturally this view strongly appeals
to teleologists, and in certain philosophical quarters, it
has been unwarrantably used. It is a very comfortable
sentiment and appeals to the popular imagination. But
when it comes to an inquiry into actual facts, it falls to the
ground. Bateson goes as far as to say that “ no fragment
of real evidence can be produced in its support.’’+
There are, of course, other views of Orthogenesis.
Thus, Hans Gadow speaks of orthogenetic changes “as
predictable in their results as the river which tends to
shorten its course to the direct line from its head waters
to the sea. That is the river’s ‘entelechy’, and no more
clue to purpose or design than is the series of improvements
*** Materials for the Study of Variation,’ Maemillan, 1894.
+ Darwin and Modern Science,” p. 101.
BY HEBER A. LONGMAN. 29
from the many gill-bearing partitions of a shark to the
fewer and more highly-finished comb-shaped gills of a
Telostean fish.’’*
Kellogg writes of believers in a kind of Orthogenesis,
implying that “‘ organic evolution has been, and is now,
ruled by unknown inner forces inherent in organisms.
and has been independent of the influence of the outer
world. The lines of evolution are immanent, unchangeable,
and ever slowly stretch towards some ideal goal.’’+ Such
a belief savours more of abstract philosophy than of science.
J. M. Baldwin, recognising the difficulties associated
with the term Orthogenesis, used the term Orthoplasy,t
thus suggesting a freer play of the laws of natural selection.
But this term is inadequate to typify the facts. The
phenomena of variation are wider than any of the theories.
Very concisely I have endeavoured to enumerate a
number of other standpoints. Hans Driesch formulated a
view which suggests a kind of “ directive soul’ for organ-
isms, an “* entelechy ’’ operating on its course of variations-
Samuel Butler and Semon propounded a theory of organic
memory, and the latter opines that the results of stimuli
can never be wholly lost. The quintessence of Weis-
mannism is a struggle between hereditary forces, with
nutrition as a contributory factor. De Vries looks upon
nutrition as a dynamic of individual variability and muta-
tion, and here may be gathered much evidence from many
practical experimenters. Of intense interest are the
researches of Loeb and Poulton who have recorded many
experiments—the former chiefly with marine invertebrates
and the latter mostly with the pupal stages of insects—
which apparently demonstrate that variation, and even
the life form itself mechanically react to chemical and other
external processes. The experiments of C. W. Beebe.
New York Zoological Society, are illuminating in the same
respect with relation to Passerine birds. He shows that
alterations in temperature and food are accompanied by
changes in plumage and in the moulting season, and that
*Pres. Ad. Zool. Sect. Brit. Assn., 1913.
+“ Darwinism To-day,” p. 278.
~ {Quoted by Osborn. Op. cit. post.
30 RADIOGENESIS IN EVOLUTION.
the inherited succession of plumage may he interrupted at
the will of the experimenter.* In the summary of the
Horn Expedition, Baldwin Spencer notes the varying sizes
of mature specimens of the smaller marsupials, especially
Phascologale cristicauda, found in the central district of
Australia. In good seasons large specimens were found,
but during the series of bad seasons and dearth of food,
the animals secured were much smaller.t Do we not see
here a diminutive form in process of evolution ? If certain
forms are dwarfed through partial starvation, the result
is very obvious in the life of the individual, and this may be
intensified in offspring subjected to the same conditions,
whether the principle of natural selection operate or not.
Perhaps such diminutive forms as the Shetland cattle and
ponies may here be given as an island parallel to arid
conditions in continental areas. To take a wider outlook.
there is indubitable evidence that the known history of
the Marsupialia in Australia is mainly a record of the
survival of relatively small forms, whilst the larger mono-
tremes, wombats, kangaroos and polyprotodonts, to say
nothing of the giant Diprotodon and Notetheriwm, have
died out. This has been a concomitant of the gradual
change from more exuberant conditions of the Pleistocene
period.
In contradistinction to Loeb, the most distinguished
representative of the vitalist school— Bergson, claims that
variations cannot be explained as mere mechanical response
to stimuli, but spring from an internal creative impulse.
Here may be added Ray Lankester’s timely reminder that
‘variation is a common attribute of many natural sub-
stances of which living matter is only one.”{ Even
Astronomy furnishes an example, for has not Saturn a
satellite which goes round * the wrong way ”’!
Of exceptional interest is the work done by Karl
Pearson, who in his ** Grammar of Science’ has accumu-
lated a multitude of observations on heredity and variation
largely with reference to the problems of humanity itself.
* Zoologica,’ Feb., 1914.
+Horn Expedition, Pl. I., p. 143.
t* Science from an Easy Chair,” Ser. I., p. 35.
BY HEBER A. LONGMAN. 31
In connection with these observations the term * Biomet-
rics ’’ is coming into popular usage.
Henry F. Osborn, a_ well-known American writer.
claims that there are four inseparable and inter-associated
factors of evolution, viz.: Heredity, Ontogeny, Environ-
ment and Selection. The working of these four factors
he elaborates under the term Tetraplasy. He defines
Ontogeny as the expression of heredity reaching to and
modified by the conditions of life, of environment and of
selection, and summarises no less than 24 ontogenic pro-
cesses.* Here we have a much wider outlook and one
which is more in harmony with the complex phenomena
of variations. Osborn’s work cannot be neglected by any
careful student of Heredity.
Thomson and Geddes have given us an attractive
theory of evolutionary processes which owes much of its
charm to the poetic feeling and literary style of the authors.
They write of definite variations which branch dichotom-
ously, “forms thrown from the rhythmic oscillation of the
loom of life,” chiefly as the result of vegetative and repro-
ductive forces. Nature to them is no * gladiators’ show ”’
(to use Huxley’s term). They view variations as definite
rather than indefinite, ~~ with progress essentially through
the subordination of individual struggle and development
to species-maintaining ends. The ideal of evolution is
thus no gladiators’ show, but an Eden: and though
competition can never be wholly eliminated—-the line of
progress is thus no straight line, but at most an asymptote—it
is much for our natural history to see no longer struggle, but
yx o99
love as * creation’s final law
But with all due regard to the prestige of these able
writers, may we not see here the result of theorising too
much on physiological analyses of present day organisms,
instead of endeavouring to obtain a comprehensive view
ofthe march of life from the past to the present. Does not
modern palacontology suggest that variations have branch-
ed not definitely and simply but polychotomously ¢ The
‘key to the process has been Radiogenesis, and not Ortho-
genesis, even though the latter term be much qualified.
*Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phil. 2nd Ser. Vol. XV, 1912.
a2 RADIOGENESIS IN EVOLUTION.
And it would surely be hypocritical to deny that nature
manifests its “‘ gladiators’ shows’’, even though the amphi-
theatre be an Eden.
We have now on record a multitude of examples of a
wide range of radial variation in many groups. For the
purposes of this paper but two instances are given. In
the Hawaiian Islands the song birds which constitute the
family Drepanide show remarkable diversity. Each island
has its group of species, and some of these are confined
to a small district. “‘ to a single kind of thicket. or a single
species of tree.” To quote Jordan and Kellogg. “ In this
family are about forty species of birds all much alike as to
general structure, but diverging amazingly from each other
in the form of the bill, with. also. striking differences in the
colour of the plumage. . . . we find Drepanide in
Hawaii fitted to almost every kind of life for which a song
bird in the tropics may possibly become adapted.”* For
the second example we may quote, from the same authorities,
the land snails of Oahu, (Hawaii.) ‘* According to Mr.
Gulick, the land snails of the wooded portion of Oahu have
become split up into 175 species represented by 700 or 800
varieties. He frequently finds a genus represented in
several successive valleys by allied species, sometimes
feeding on the same and similar plants. In every case,
the valleys that are nearest each other furnish the most
nearly allied forms, and a full set of the varieties of each
species presents a minute gradation between the more
divergent types found in the more widely separated locali-
ties.’+ The establishment of these variations. in both
birds and snails, is almost certainly due to isolation, but the
actual variability itself may be well expressed by a principle
of Radiogenesis.
It is now an axiom that similar structures have been
independently developed in different groups. ~* The eye,”
says Hans Gadow, * has been invented dozens of times.”
Walter Stapley writes: “It seems a process of narrow
reasoning which admits the origin of new species, but refuses
to admit that new structures may be evolved. The denial
*“ Evolution and Animal Life,’ p. 124.
TOp. cit., p. 123.
Op. cit.
BY HEBER A. LONGMAN. 33
of the appearance of new structures seems to be the basis
of the theory of atavism.”’* —Stapley illustrates this stand
point by demonstrating that where neck ribs have degener-
ated into vestiges in certain cases they have re-evolved in
response to a different impluse. Doubtless many structures
once traced to atavistic influences are in reality new.
Here we may appropriately note that Hans Gadow
in his presidential address to the Zoological Section
of the British Association last year gave a most
useful summary of both facts and nomenclature associated
with the old terms of convergence and parallelism.
Then, too, there are evidences of the exuberance of
life for which we need seek no causal explanation. Darwin
was content to look upon certain manifestations as being .
incidental and unimportant. In the “ Descent of Man ’’t
he says: * Bearing in mind how many substances closely
analogous to natural organic compounds have been recently
formed by chemists, and which exhibit the most splendid
colours, it would have been a strange fact if substances
sunilarly coloured had not often originated, independently
if any useful end thus gained, in the complex laboratory of
living things.”’ Bateson says,f “I feel sure that. we shall
be rightly interpreting the facts of nature if we cease to
expect to find purposefulness wherever we meet with
definite structures or patterns.” Starr Jordan, when
writing of the bright colours of coral fishes, says that these
eannot be explained on protective lines, and that nature
seems to revel in bright colours when it is safe for her’
creatures to have them. Dendy instances the sculptured
patterns on the calcareous shells of Foraminifera as charac-
ters which are of no adaptive value and which might be
equally well replaced by alternative characters. These
patterns are of a specific nature, but he cogently asks, ** Does
one pattern help a unicellular foraminiferan or radiolarian
more than another in the struggle for existence ?’’** The
theories of warning, protective, adaptive and sexual colour-
ation and recognition marks account for a large proportion
*=Pro. Roy. SOC., Vics PXewV-. bl. Le Ang.) LOL?
+2nd Edition, p. 262. n
ft Darwin and Modern Science,” p. 100.
** Outlines of Evolutionary Biology.” p. 419.
34 RADIOGENESIS IN EVOLUTION.
of chromatic characteristics, but many critics are demon-
strating that these theories have been pushed to absurd
lengths. Here | may mention the work of Dewar and Finn*
and of Punnett. The very perfection of some mimetic
resemblances in butterflies, the simulation of fungoid
growths on a leaf pattern, for instance, is so unnecessary
and elaborate that it is difficult to account for on utilitarian
lines. There is a rich diversity of pattern and colour which
is a manifestation of radiogenetic variation. In passing
we may note that such cases cannot be claimed as evidence
by the exponents of Vitalism. Radiogenesis, when com-
pared with Orthogenesis, is at variance with any teleological
conception. But I must not be tempted to dwell on this
point, more especially as I have dealt with it elsewhere.+
The striking divergence of opinions among authorities
shows the difficulties attending the present study of vari-
ation and heredity. And here it seems to me that more
light can sometimes be shown by a study of the past than
by an analysis of the present. May we not learn more,
both of laws and of dynamics, by collating evidence as to
the paths variations have gone, rather than by endeavour-
ing to trace the tracks they are taking’ It has been aptly
stated that man’s outlook on the processes of nature during
his life-time is comparable to the momentary illumination
of a landscape during a lightning flash in a midnight storm.
It is therefore not to be wondered at, keen though our
observers be, that investigations in laboratories and ex-
periment grounds during the last half century have not
satisfactorily elucidated what nature has accumulated
during long geological periods.
Palaeontology is one of the voungest of sciences, but
it has not escaped many initial errors. Nor are we here
referring to such obviously incorrect views as the ~ Cat-
astrophism ’’ of Cuvier. The principle of some of the
older workers was to judge the complete biota of past
geological periods merely as preparatory stages for the life
of to-day. The assurance with which Haeckel drew up
genealogical trees (tentatively, it is true) startled even
*“ The Making of Species,” John Lane, 1909.
+“ The Religion of a Naturalist,” p. 38. (R.P.A.—Watts & Co.)
BY HEBER A. LONGMAN. 35
Darwin. Endeavours were made to read into all extinct
forms some lineal association with modern organisms. This
resulted from a very natural idea that our modern world
with its fauna and flora was in reality the swmmum bonum
of all life and that the processes of nature, without exception,
were so arranged as to establish a suitable environment for
man. Now we have somewhat to amend this view. We
cannot always judge the past by the present. In each era
life has radiated out apparently to the full gamut of
potentialitv. There have been rich developments of cer-
tain groups in different periods. One may note such well-
known instances as the abundance of Trilobites in the
Cambrian, Dipnoid fish in the Devonian, Nawtiloidea in the
Silurian and .immonoidea in the Trias. Systematists have
already noted about 5000 species of Ammonites, and so
abundant is material that the evolution of the group from
its origin to its extinction has been well worked out. Some
of the forms were very highly specialised, and the maze of
their sutures—often beautifully shown in our Queensland
Cretaceous specimens—demonstrates an organism of great
complexity. The protean development of marine, land
an‘ air forms of reptilian life in Mesozoic times exhausts
the most superlative of adjectives when description is
attempted. The great majority of these forms were lateral
offshoots from the main stream of life, and they have no
lineal relationship with the animals of to-day. Many were
apparently the victims of over-specialisation, of hyper-
trophy. Here the multitude of diverse forms gives evidence
of radial evolution, of wild exuberance of life flourishing
for a time until cut short by the iron laws of natural selec-
tion. And in the succeeding age of mammals we find a
similar story. Tertiary times show a rich development
of mammalian life, including gigantic types, and many of
these were not potential for the future. Certain forms
came upon the stage of existence, played but a brief part.
geologically speaking. and then disappeared. These were
the derelicts of nature, the failures in the struggle of life.
Yet they were no weaklings, and some carried a bulk of
bone which is astounding. They were not lacking in
virility, but in plasticity. Other forms were forerunners of
the fauna of to-day ; their very life-blood runs in present-
36 RADIOGENESIS IN EVOLUTION.
day species. We know the lineage of the horse, the elephant,
the camel and several other groups. Although there are
lacune in our palaeontological knowledge we can never
hope to fill, some strata have yielded surprisingly complete
evidence on the evolution of certain groups.
Still more familiar examples to Australasian workers
of radial evolution may be noted. In New Zealand wingless
avian forms developed on such lines as though they had
striven to take the place of the missing land mammals. ‘These
existed until recent times, and their pigmy cousins (the
Kiwis) are with us still. In Australia among the living
and extinct marsupial forms, the majority of the types
found in the true placentals have their analogues. We
have, or have had, large and small herbivorous, insectivorous
and carnivorous forms, and there are diverse examples of
semi-subterranean, burrowing, arboreal. parachuting and
saltatorial habits. Divergencies may be illustrated by the
dental characteristics, say, of Thylacoleo, Sarcophilus,
Hypsiprymnus, Diprotodon, Phascolomys. Myrmecobius and
Notoryctes. Such striking distinctions in an order in one
region may be generalised as due to a principle of Radio-
genesis. These marsupials have not been stationary since
Tertiary times; they show processes of rapid evolution,
and in some cases we have evidence of degeneracy ; nor
can we translate the characteristics of many of our extinct
forms in terms of lineal relationship with the life of to-day,
and they add further complexity to our fauna.
Thus the life of the past makes multifold the variation
of to-day. Perhaps the crux of the whole problem may
be expressed in the two questions put by Osborn,” the
American palaeontologist.* ‘‘Is it true that the greater -
number of new or germinal characters which appear are
orderly and according to some entirely unknown law of adap-
tation? Or is it true that the greater number of new
characters are accidental, disorderly. fortuitous, adaptive
or inadaptive, fitted or unfitted, and that order comes out
of chaos by the selection of those which happen to be fit / a
—natural selection mimicking design, as Balfour puts it.
*Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phil., Ser. 2, Vol. XV., 1912, p. 301.
BY HEBER A. LONGMAN. 37
But must these questions be arbitrarily put as alter-
natives? To vary the phrasing, was Samuel Butler—
that clever but contradictious writer,” as Lankester
calls him—justified in opposing ** Luck to Cunning ? ”’
Are not both * Luck” and *‘ Cunning ”’ factors in evolu-
tionary processes /
Theories of variation are incomplete unless they
provide for the facts of momentum, or excessive growth,
for the tendencies to develop colossal structures such as the
huge dorsal plates of the Stegosaurs, the teeth of the sabre
tiger, the antlers of the Irish elk, the tusks of the mammoth,
and the horns of the weird Arsinoithcrium. Theories have
to be elastic enough to allow for teratological phenomena,
for malformations and abnormalities, for such growths
as are associated under the term Dysteleology. Some
examples, which might be noted here, so far as the individual
is concerned, exhibit no principle of radiogenesis, but
rather one of orthogenesis almost ** run mad,” to our human
view, for some of the structures associated with extinct
animals appear to have been carried to a degree far in excess
of utility.
Zittel, in the introduction to his well-known text-book
of Palaeontology, says: * Evolution in the organic world
has not advanced in a simple, straight-forward direction,
but in an exceedingly complicated and circuitous.’ Palaeo-
botanists also tell us that the development of plants has
sometimes been accompanied by a progress from the com-
plex to the simple, which is almost a retrogression.* Such
processes are not, of course, the general rule, but they are
notable exceptions. D. H. Scott notes that in the evolution
of plants there have been long periods of stability—* that
times of comparative constancy have alternated with
intervals of apparently rapid change.”
In the * Natural History of Plants ’”’ (Kerner, trans-
lated by Oliver.) which is one of the most authoritative
botanical works, the difficulties of theories of progressive
development are emphasised. The impossibility is stated
of estimating any order of plants as being the most highly
*Scott : “ Evolution of Plants,” p. 17.
38 RADIOGENESIS IN EVOLUTION.
developed. Thus certain sea-weeds (Macrocystis) are as
large as forest trees, and the cell structure of Diatoms and
Desmids “‘ must be regarded as more highly organized than
many small annual composites.”” The author asks which
group has reached the highest point—is it the Aristolo-
chiacexwe, Cannacee, Magnoliacee, the Orchids, the Com-
posites, the Ranunculacexw, the Papilionacexw or the Pome-
granates’ . . . Like the theory of adaptability, that of
progressive transformations from inherent forces fails to
give us a reasonable explanation of the variations which
plants have undergone in process of time.””*
Cope used the term “ expression-point ”’ for the fixed
and definite acquisition of some new character which has
marked a new advance in the gradation of life. And
Smith Woodward adds that this “seems to have rendered
possible, or, at least, been an essential accompaniment of
afresh outburst of developmental energy.”’ -The same writer
says: “* Palaeontology, indeed. is clearly in favour of the
theory of discontinuous mutation, or advance by sudden
changes, which has lately received so much support from
the botanical experiments of H. de Vries.”’+
Dendy in his lucid work, * Outlines of Evolutionary
Biology,’ { states that the branching of the phylogenetic
tree, representing the evolution of life, has been monopodial
rather than dichotomous or polychotomous. But here we
think there is a great deal of opposing evidence. Latterly
there has been accumulated palaeontological material
which points to a multiple origin of many types. It seems
not unlikely that even man himself arose radially from a
number of mutable anthropoid forms. The authority of
Arthur Keith** may be quoted to the effect that certain
fossil crania, amongst which may be included the famous
Piltdown skull, Hoanthropus Dawsoni, and Neanderthal
types, represent distinct and extinct types of humanity and
not forms ancestral to modern man. And there is no
arbitrary reason why these distinct genera and _ species
Wolly Mie 95 BEES
yAnu. & Mag. of Nat. His., Vol. 18, 1906, p. 316,
Op. cit., p. 230.
*** Bedrock,’ January, 1914. (In the same journal, April, 1914,
G. Elliot Smith strongly dissents from this view).
BY HEBER A. LONGMAN. 39
should be traced back to one isolated mutation ; in fact,
many observations on the origin of mutations and vari-
ations to-day are opposed to that view, for- such often
arise in profusion and not in isolation.
Have we not undoubted evidence that the paths of
variation in the past, even under the iron restriction of
natural selection, have been radial? It seems to me
that radial diagrams, such as those used by H. W. Conn,
represent the courses of evolution more accurately than
simple dichotomous branching; and, to be logical, one
must assume that such diagrams should be primarily radial,
and secondarily polychotomous. Such diagrams, although
necessarily tentative, are surely an appropriate expression
of the labyrinthine processes of evolution.
CACLE. OR PRICKLY PEARS
By JOHN SHIRLEY, D.Sc., and C. A.
LAMBERT.
( Read hefore the Royal Society of Queensland, June 29th, 1914)
1.—INTRODUCTORY.
No plant of the Cactus family is a native of Australia :
their native home is America; they inhabit the drier
districts of the S.W. United States, Mexico, the West Indies,
Central America, and the warmer parts of South America.
Just as the name of Mr. Walter Hill is often held up for
scorn as the introducer of the so-called Sida retusa into
Queensland, when he merely carried it from one part of
Queensland to another, recognising its possibilities as a
fibre plant, so various persons have been given the credit,
or discredit, of introducing different Cacti into Australia.
Mr. J. H. Maiden,* Government Botanist of New South
Wales, a most diligent and methodical investigator of
plants of this family, has shown that their introduction
to Australia was due to Governor Phillip, and that the first
cuttings were brought out by the fleet that founded Sydney,
and took possession of Australia on behalf of the Empire.
2?.—PECULIARITIFS OF THE Cactus FAMILY.
The ideal country for the establishment of the Cacti,
known to us as Prickly Pears, is one in which a rainy season
*A preliminary Study of the Prickly Pears naturalised in New South
Wales; Department of Agriculture, N.S.W., Miscellaneous Publication,
No. 253
PLATE [V.
Fieavre 1—Tangential section ct developing spine of Opuntia inermis, D.C.
Figure 2—Epidermis of Opuniia inermis, D.C., showing numerous sphere-
crystals of oxalate of lime.
Proc. Roy. Soc. Q’LAND, Vol. xXvI. Puate IV.
PLATE V.
Figure 1—Transverse section of cladode of Opuntia tnermis, D.C., showing
from the outer layer inwards—
IS The epidermis of one layer of cells.
Il. Single layer containing crystals of oxalate of lime.
ILL. Dermis or collenchyma of five layers of cells.
IV. Palisade parenchyma.
We On the right centre a stomatal tube.
VI. Below it a mass of crystal sand.
Ficure 2
Evidermis of Cereus granditlorus, Haw., showing seven stomata.
P
R
O
Cc
Pus 5
oO
Y
Bios
SO
“5
Ore
ne
N
D
ove
ol
ae
x
y
I
4
Ek
1G
2
Pi
LA
TE V
PLATE VI.
Kira URE |] —"T'ransv erse section of cladode of Cereus g randi lorus H aw.
: a > ’
showing from the outer surface in wards—
I. Kpidermis with uneven cuticularisation,
II. Dermis or collenchyma of four layers of cells with greatly
strengthened cell-walls.
III. Palisade parenchyma.
[V. In the centre a stomatal tube.
Fiaurr 2—Transverse section through the flower-bud of Peireskia aculeata,
Mill., showing parts of several petals and sepals.
PLATE
Proc. Roy. Soc. Q’Lanp, Vol xxvt.
2;
oh)
Ric
BY JOHN SHIRLEY, D.SC., AND C. A. LAMBERT. 4]
alternates with periods of dry weather, or even of drought,
in which there is little trouble from frost ; where there is a
depth of soil not less than ten inches in thickness, containing
a fair percentage of lime; and where there is a rainfall
for the year of at least ten to twelve inches. All these
conditions are provided in the greater part of Queensland
and Northern N.S. Wales, hence the rapidity with which
introduced plants of this family have spread in these
States, as well as in countries providing like conditious—
S. India, Ceylon, 8. Africa, ete.
An introduced plant in a new country has many
advantages over native species. It has left its natural
enemies behind, and the insects or mammals that are likely
to prey upon it are some time before they discover its
uses. It therefore thrives and spreads at this stage more
readily than in its native haunts. But the Cacti are
specially adapted to ward off enemies. Those that are
proving pests in Australia have no true leaves; the
stems are flattened, they retain their epidermis, and are
green because their cells are furnished with chlorophyll.
The true leaves fall off when young, or are changed into
spines. It is much more difficult for noxious insects to
damage these cladodes, as the flattened stems are called,
than to damage an ordinary foliage leaf. Again, at each
node, the point from which leaves or flowers spring, instead
of leaves or branches, there are sharp spines, in some species
2-3 inches long, and a tuft of bristles or spinules, often
furnished with a most formidable clothing of recurved
barbs. These defences serve to keep away most of the
grazing mammals. On the grazing farms in Texas, the
spines are burnt off by means of flames from small
acetylene tanks, borne by employees, and the cattle
following the workmen feed upon the disarmed cactus.
As a protection against insects, all species yet
examined by the authors of this paper are found to have
the cells of some portion of the cladode, or in Peireskia
of the leaf, armed with crystals of oxalate of lime. In
Opuntia inermis, D.C., the pest pear of Queensland and New
South Wales, and Opuntia aurantiaca, Gillies established
near Warwick, sphere-crystals form an almost continuous
D
42 CACT&, OR PRICKLY PEARS.
layer, occupying cells lying directly below the epidermis ;
other needle-shaped crystals of similar or nearly similar
composition are to be found in the cell walls of cortical
and deeper layers. The vascular strands are also
protected on each side, in many species, by other cells
filled with sphzroraphides. Not only are these crystals
a kind of protective armour whose sharp points repel the
attacks of insect larvze*, of coccids, and other soft-bodied
creatures, but the cells containing them seem to be avoided
by fungi. In making sections of Cacti so protected, each
of the two workers found the knives of their microtomes
rapidly blunted, and far more difficulty was experienced
in obtaining good sections than with any other vegetable |
tissue. The needle-shaped crystals, true raphides, are
very abundant in our grass trees, and make the sectioning
of parts of those plants difficult: but the sphere-crystals
or spheroraphides of the cortex of Opuntia offer far more
difficulty.
3.—PLANTsS NATURALISED IN QUEENSLAND.
Omitting plants like the night-blooming Cereus,
C. grandiflorus, which may occasionally be seen climbing
over scrub or forest trees near a deserted homestead,
the Barbadoes Gooseberry, Peireskia aculeata, already
mentioned. and species of Rhipsalis, Hchinocactus,
Melocactus, and Mammillaria seen in our bush-houses,
the introduced species that have fully established themselves
n our State belong to two genera, Nopalea and Opuntia.
In Nopalea the essential organs, the stamens and pistil,
protrude from the petals, which press closely around
them, or are connivent, as the botanist expresses it. In
Opuntia the essential organs are shorter than the petals,
which encircle them at a distance, together forming a
funnel-shaped corolla.
The following table is a list of species likely to spread
with some of the localities from which they have been
reported :—
*Evans Botany, p. 93.
BY JOHN SHIRLEY. D.SC., AND C. A. LAMBERT. 43
SPECIES OF Opuntia AND Nopalea NATURALISED IN
QUEENSLAND.
Species. Habitat.
Warwick, common about the banks of the
Condamine, near the town.
PF Dillenii, Haw. ..| Brisbane, Gayndah, Rockhampton.
55 ficus-indica, Mill. | Occasionally seen near deserted stations.
etc., but usually reports of the presence
of this pear prove to refer to O.
tomentosa.
as inermis, D.C. .., This is the pest pear, said by Mr. Temple
| Clerk, in his booklet, “‘ The Prickly
Pear Problem,’ to cover 30 million
acres in Queensland alone, and to be
| spreading at the rate of one million
| acres a year.
|
lea
Opuntia aurantiaca, Gill. |
Bs monacantha, Haw. | On both sides the Suttor River.
3 nigricans, Haw. .. | Yelarbon, S.W. Queensland.
# tomentosa, Salm-. | Dulacca, Gracemere, Helidon, Warra, etc.
Dyck
Nopalea coccinellifera, Mill. Emerald.
3 dejecta, Salm-Dyck. | Rockhampton district.
4,—HistTo.LocicaL NOoTEs.
Besides specimens of Opuntia inermis. O. aurantiaca,
and O. monacantha, by the kindness of Mr. J. F. Bailey,
Director, Botanic Gardens, Brisbane. we obtained
specimens of Cereus grandiflorus, Haw.. Echinocactus
Eyresvi, Luce., Petreskia aculeata, Mill.. and Rhipsalis
salicornoides, D.C. These were all sectioned. and examined
under the microscope, the main study being centred on
the pest species.
l.— Opuntia aurantiaca, Gillies.
This species is so well armed with a close Javer of sub-
cutaneous cells containing sphere-crystals of calcium
oxalate, as to be likely to defy all insect pests, and to
spread rapidly. It is provided with small, elongated-
ovate joints, and is easily recognisable by its reddish
epidermis, especially noticeable in young growth. See
Plate III.. Fig. 1. The epidermal cells are from ,}, to 7;
mm. in length, by one-half those dimensions in breadth.
The outer wall is thickened with a deposit of cutin until
it equals one-third the whole width of the cell, or ;4, to
ato Mm.
The dermal Jayer is formed of five rows of cells, those
of the first layer lying immediately below the epidermis,
44 CACT#, OR PRICKLY PEARS.
contain the spheroraphides of oxalate of lime, and show
like silver stars under polarised light. The cells of the
dermis increase in size in each successive and deeper layer.
In some places there is a sixth laver, whose cells deviate
from the usual brick-shaped form and are cut off at the
corners so as to be almost prismatic. This change from
the brick-shaped to the prismatic form can be gradually
traced from the surface inwards. The dermal cells are
very thick walled, and the cell walls take up the stains as
freely almost as the nuclei of the cells.
Since the flattened joints of Opuntia have to perform
the functions both of leaf and stem, it is not surprising
to find the cortical tissue playing the part, and copying
the structure of the outer mesophyll of foliage leaves, and
the same term, palisade parenchyma, may be applied to it
This tissue is found immediately below the dermis, on
each side of the stem, with a depth of about 10 rows of
oblong cells, set with the long axis at right angles to the
epidermis. An average cell is about ), mm. long by about
half that breadth. The outer palisade cells are supplied
with numerous chloroplasts, but these are replaced by
leucoplasts in the inner layers. When viewed in direct
sunlight, or in polarised light, the walls of these cells were
seen to contain minute crystals of acicular form. Some
few cells of the outer or sub-dermal rows contained masses
of yellow-brown crystals, the so-called crystal sand. The
spherocrystals were ,, mm. in diameter. See Plate IIL,
big. l., and Fig. 2.
Il.—Opuntia inermis, D.C.
The same general structure is seen in this as in
O. aurantiaca, but the sphere-crystals though quite as
numerous, and occupying the same sub-epidermal position,
are smaller, varying from ; to s4, mm. The walls of the
palisade cells are studded with smaller and isolated
crystals. Tawny masses of crystal sand were also evident
in this species. Plate IV., Figs. | and 2.
In a transverse section of a joint or flattened stem,
the vascular bundles are found at the base of each mass
of palisade parenchyma. The wood vessels are few in
BY JOHN SHIRLEY, D.SC., AND C. A. LAMBERT. 45,
number*, and usually showed spiral strengthening lavers.
The bast vessels form a larger mass of tissue, and in a few
of the vascular bundles appeared to be bi-collateral.
In the palisade parenchyma, and also in the medullary
or water-storing tissue of the stele, are numerous air-
cavities. The inner walls of these cavities take up some
stains readily, and, under a low power, look like dark
blotches, but with proper focussing, and with a high power,
the outlines of the cells lining them can be revealed. In
a rather thick section, stained with hematoxylin, there
are signs of tubes connecting the air cells of the medulla
with those of the two layers of parenchyma, and in all
cases there are passages from the stomata to the air-spaces.
The breathing spaces are } to 4, mm. in greatest diameter,
and are usually globular or elliptical in shape. Plate V.,
Bigs:
On each side of the vascular bundles the sphere-crystals
are thickly scattered; they are sparingly seen in the
walls of the medullary tissue or aqueous tissue as it has
been termed, because its cells store up water after every
fall of rain.t
IIL.— Opuntia monacantha, Haw.
An examination of stems of this pear make it easy
to understand why the cochineal insect can damage this
species, while its attacks have no effect on such plants
as O. inermis and O. aurantiaca. The armour of sphere-
crystals is almost absent from the subepidermal layer
of the dermis, and though there are traces of small oxalate
of lime crystals in the walls of the palisade cells, they are
only seen with high powers, and are not by any means too
evident even then, though sought for with the aid of
polarised light. In all other respects the histology agrees
with that reported for the species already mentioned.
IV.—Peitreskia aculeata, Mill.
The Barbadoes Gooseberry possesses true foliage
leaves, and its flowers prove an excellent attraction for
bees; specimens seen near the river banks at Corinda
*Possibly because for ease in sectioning young tissue was usually
selected.
Kerner and Oliver, I., 329.
46 CACT, OR PRICKLY PEARS.
and in the Botanic Gardens always claim attention during
the flowering period by the buzzing of their numerous
visitors.
The sepals have an upper and a lower epidermis, and,
as is usual. show little differentiation of the mesophyll
into spongy and palisade parenchyma. Air spaces are
very numerous, and take up a large portion of the whole
space filled by the mesophyll. Massed crystals, less acute
than those forming the sphere-crystals of Opuntia, are
found in the subepidermal layer, parallel to both surfaces.
The stem shows the usual division, on transverse
section. into palisade layers, vascular bundles, and medulla
or aqueous layer, as in Opuntia: but in all tissues except
the vascular bundles, the cells are shortly oblong in outline,
the longer axis being to the transverse axis as 3: 2. In
palisade cells the long axis is at right angles to the
epidermis, in aqueous tissue it is parallel to the surface.
Plate VI., Fig. 2.
V.— Cereus grandiflorus, Haw.
Epidermal cells have the wavy outline so common
in similar cells of foliage leaves in numerous dicotyledons.
The cells of the internal tissue are crowded with acicular
(true) raphides, or crystals of oxalate of lime; and these
are seen like a halo round the circumference of the plant
section. having escaped from cut cells. A wound on
the surface of this cactus, exposes a number of slime-
cells containing raphides. Any rain or dew that fell would
be imbibed by them in excess, and, their walls rupturing,
the contained needles would be extruded, and form
defensive chevaux-de-frise round the wounded portion.
Plate V., Fig 2, and Plate VI., Fig. 1.
VI.— Echinocactus Eyresii, Luc.
The stem of this plant shows little differentiation of
internal tissue. The cells of the central medulla differ
little in shape from those of the palisade parenchyma,
although the longest axis is parallel to the epidermis. In
places the true epidermis, which does not take up the stain,
is 6-7 cells thick, the extra layers formed of cork cells.
It is probable that this is a defence against fungal attack.
On the opposite surface the epidermis was normal—one
BY JOHN’ SHIRLEY, D:SC., AND C. A. LAMBERT. 47
cell thick. In all positions it has a dermal layer. two cells
in thickness, giving the reactions in the cell-wall for true
cellulose. These cell-walls are greatly strengthened and absorb
colour readily. In re-entering angles the dermal layer,
or collenchyma, may be 4-5 cells thick. In places the
strengthening layers have almost obliterated the cell cavity.
In other respects the structure is that normal to the order.
Plate VII.; Figs, 1; 2:
VII — Rhipsalis salicornoides, D.C.
The thong-like stems of this plant, an epiphyte from
the American forests, are in structure more like the stem
of an ordinary dicotyledon, than any other yet examined.
The stele contains numerous wood vessels, mostly spiral,
but has the central aqueous tissue of the Cactz instead of
pith. The cortical regions, as shewn in _ longitudinal
sections, are filled with the usual air-cavities, joined by
tubes or passages to the stomata. All the cells—palisade
cells and medullary tissue—are very minute. Crystals of
oxalate of lime, in rhomboidal or irregular masses, are
found mainly in the stele, and especially near the woody
tissue
NOTES ON THI MARINE MOLLUSCA OF
QUEENSLAND.
Parr Lil
By JOHN SHIRLEY, DSc., F.M.S.
(Read before the Royal Society of Queensland, June 29th,
1914.)
SINCE publishing my last list of additions to the Queens-
land Marine Mollusca, a number of additional species have
been reported, and there have been some changes in
nomenclature to which attention should be drawn.
Class PELECYPODA.
Family ARCID/.
Genus ARCA, Linneus.
Arca Fusca, Bruguitre, No. 25, Hedley’s list.
s. Arca pistachia, Lamarck. Hanley, Recent Shells,
p. 154, remarks ** Smaller, but scarcely differing
from %p: 336:
s. Ringicula arctata, Angas non Gould. Hedley’s
list, No. 1709.
BY JOHN SHIRLEY, D.SC., F.M.S. 5D
RINGICULA DENTICULATA, Gould. Hedley, Stud. Aust.
Moll.; XI., P.L.S. N.S.W., Vol. 38, Pt. 2., 1913, p. 336.
s. Ringicula caron, Angas non Hinds. Hedley’s list,
Now TELE
Family TORNATINIDA.
Genus RETUSA, Brown.
Retusa pecussatTa, A. Adams. Hedley, P.L.S. N.S.W.,
Vol pS. 29 l91ssp 337:
R. impasta, Hedley, No. 1904, Marine Mollusca of
>
3.
Queensland.
SOME. OFL-BEARING SEEDS INDIGENOUS TO
QUEENSLAND:
By FRANK SMITH, B.Sc., F.I.C.
* (Read before the Royal Society of Queensland, August 14th,
1914.)
II.—THE OIL OF CALLOPHYLLUM INOPHYLLUM
(Domba Nut).
CALLOPHYLLUM INOPHYLLUM (N. QO. Guttifere), widely
distributed over East Africa, the East Indies and Polynesia,
occurs plentifully in Queensland on the northern seaboard.
The tree is an evergreen, commonly referred to in literature
as the Alexandrian Laurel, the fruits as Laurel or Domba
Nuts, under which latter name they were submitted to me
through the courtesy of Howard Newport, Esq., Instructor
in Tropical Agriculture. The examination of their oil
is interesting in comparison with Callophyllum inophyllum
oil elsewhere reported.
An account of the oil appears in the Agricultural
Ledger (1911-12, No. 5) “Oils and Fats of India”
(Dictionary of Economic Products), and its commercial
examination has recently been conducted at the Imperial —
Institute. (Bull. Imp. Inst.. Vol. XI., No. 4, Oct.-Dec.,
1913.)
The Domba nut examined by the author agreed in
general characteristics with Indian — specimens. The
average weight, enclosed in the dried pericarp, was 16.7
grams, of which the pericarp weighed 2.7 grams. The
shell is soft. woody, and easily broken ; the kernel yellowish-
BY FRANK SMITH, B.SC., F.1.C. 57
white, oval, and averages 7.2 grams in weight. The
sample here described would appear somewhat larger
than those elsewhere reported. Examination of the ground
kernel showed a moisture content of 21.7 per cent., and
of oil extracted by low boiling-point petrol of 54.7 per
cent.
The oil is viscous, yellow in colour with a slight greenish
tinge, and of slight bitter taste and faint aromatic odour.
A bulk extraction was made by compression in a screw
press, and a quantity of oil obtained possessing a deep
blue colour and depositing some amount of crystalline
substance on standing.
The blue colour given by Callophyllum oils by contact
with iron has already been noticed (Bull. Imp. Inst. loc. cit.),
and was due in the present case to use of an iron press.
The blue colouration was also obtained by treatment with
a small amount of alcoholic ferric chloride and is ascribable
to the presence of a resino-tannol hereafter noticed. The
deposited crystals were ascertained to be stearic acid.
ANALYTICAL CONSTANTS OF THE OIL.
Queensland Indian* Indiant Fijit
Sample. Sample. Sample. Sample.
TbebaGs
Sp. gr. at 9394 9415
15252:
Acid Value ae eR 67.5 THe 16.2
Hehner No. in Pe ee 92.9 91.9
Sapon. Value z3 wey) L825 198.7 194.9 204.0
[odine Value Si ye L0020 95.3 93.1 9252
Unsap. Matter .. re Lye 35% 1.4% 1.4%
THE CONSTANTS OF THE SEPARATED ACIDS.
Queensland Indian
Sample.t Sample.*
Neutralisation value 193.7 . 192.3
Iodine value... 92.0 94.8
* Agr. Ledger loc. cit.
7 Bull. Imp. Inst., loc. cit.
£ Contains 6.7 per cent. of resin acid.
E
58 OIL-BEARING SEEDS INDIGENOUS TO QUEENSLAND.
THE RESIN OF CALLOPHYLLUM INOPHYLLUM OIL.
The Indian oil is stated to contain 18.26 per cent
of saponifiable resin which is separable by solution in hot
dilute alcohol.
This treatment, however, removes a portion of free
fatty acid and the separation was effected by the esterifica-
tion method of Twitchell; 6.7 per cent of resin acid was
obtained by this method as a dark viscid oil with a bitter
taste. Its potash salt was soluble in excess of alcoholic
potash, and it evidently possesses a high iodine absorption.
It strikes an intense blue-black colouration with alcoholic
ferric chloride.
THe COMPOSITION OF CALLOPHYLLUM INOPHYLLUM OIL.
Fendler, quoted in the Agricultural Ledger (loc. cit),
states this oil to contain palmitin, stearin and olein.
The fatty acids free from resin were found to have
a neutralisation value of 199.8 corresponding to a mean
molecular weight of 281.0. The iodine value is 78.0.
Separation of the liquid and solid fatty acids showed
73 per cent liquid and 27 per cent solid acids.
The iodine value of the liquid acids is 86.0 and pre-
eludes the presence of acids of higher degree of unsaturation
than oleic acid. Fractional crystallisation of the solid
acids from alcohol gave the following fractions : (1) imcom-
pletely melted at 85°C. ; (2) M. Pt. 69.5° C. ; (3) M. Pt.
68° C.; (4) M. Pt. 62° C. Further fractionation of (1)
gave a small proportion of a crystalline substance melting
at 110° - 112° C., which was not identified and probably
s not a fatty acid.
Fractions (2) and (3) comprised the major portion
and are stearic acid. Fraction (4) coincides in melting point
with palmitic acid. ,
Hence the glycerides of Callophyllum oil are composed
principally of olein and stearin with a smaller proportion
of palmitin. The high acid number is due to the presence
in the normal oil of a considerable proportion of free fatty
acid, notably stearic acid.
——T
BY FRANK SMITH, B.SC., F.1.C. 59
THE COMMERCIAL VALUE OF THE OIL.
It is interesting to note that Callophyllum kernels
are quoted by the Imperial Institute as worth £16 per
ton, basing the valuation on an oil content of 71 per cent.,
the kernels being notably drier than those examined in
the present instance. The oil is undoubtedly, from its
non-drying property, best adapted for soap-making pur-
poses. Its bitter taste is detrimental to its edible property.
It is stated to be used as a burning oil by natives in India.
Examination of a press-cake containing 15 per cent of oil
showed it to contain .32 per cent P,O,, .68 per cent
K,0O, 1.40 per cent N. Its manurial and nutritive value
is, therefore, low.
SUMMARY.
(1) Queensland Callophyllum inophyllum kernels are
rich in a non-drying oil closely agreeing in properties with
the oil described elsewhere.
(2) The oil is associated with a resino-tannol.
(3) It consists of olein, stearin and palmitin, as stated
by another investigator, and a considerable proportion
of free fatty acid.
Ill.—THE OIL OF THE SEED OF HERNANDIA
BIVALVIS (Gtease Nut.)
HERNANDIA BIVALVIS (N. QO. Laurine) is a fair sized
tree, evergreen and with a spreading head. It occurs
widely distributed in the scrubs of Southern Queensland,
though nowhere abundantly.
Mr. C. T. White supplies the following description
of the fruit which matures in quantity in summer :—
“Fruit enclosed in an involucle which is nearly two
inches broad, much inflated, scarlet in colour, fleshy when
fresh, almost membraneous and distinctly verticulate when
dry : divided at the base into two valves. Fruit black,
about 10 ribbed, with a small terminal umbo. Seed hard.’’
60 OIL-BEARING SEEDS INDIGENOUS TO QUEENSLAND.
K. T. Staiger* dealing with the fruit and oil of the
seed writes :—
* The shells of the fruit contain a dye soluble in soda,
but not in ether, alcohol or water. The kernel contains
64.8 per cent of oil, which is similar to common laurel
oil, is of the same consistency, and has, also, the same
stearine and narcotic smell.”
I have confirmed this observation with regard to the
black pigment of the “shell ’’ and as to the general pro-
perties of the oil, which extracted from the seed proper
has a greenish tinge.
A quantity of fruit was obtained in February from
a tree at Kelvin Grove, Brisbane.
As it was impracticable to remove the investing pericarp
from the seed, the extraction of the oil was made from the
ground whole fruit, and the oil obtained was dark brown
in colour, due to removal of portion of the colouring matter
of the * shell.”
With regard to the percentage of oil present, extrac-
tion with low boiling-point petrol yielded 28.0 per cent.
Since the “‘ shell’ constitutes approximately 35 per cent
by weight of the entire fruit, the percentage calculated
upon. the seed proper or kernel to which its occurrence
is confined, is 43.0 per cent, a figure appreciably lower
than that given by Staiger.
The obviously oily nature of the seed, to which the
popular name is attributable, has led to the chemical
examination of the oil.
The seed is intensely bitter, and extraction of the oil
with solvents removes also the bitter principle.
i benon (Oyiee
The oil was extracted in bulk with ether, and is
dark brown in colour, slightly viscid, and of very bitter
taste. It possesses an oily and curious narcotic odour.
* Quoted in “ The Queensland Flora,” p. 1316.
a
BY FRANK SMITH, B.SC., F.I.C. 61
Determination of its constants was made with the
following results :—
26°C.
Sp. gr. at . 932
26°C.
Acid Value .. Bs ee ste Sc eee S40)
Hehner No (Insol. acids and _ unsaponitiable
matter) .. oc 20 ae ac ste Ose
Unsaponifiable Matte = oe Me ar 8.0 per cent.
Sapon. Value - te an e .. 186.0
Todine Value ee 5 Ee ee 2 210820
Reichert-Meissl Value :
bo
Cr
THE BrirTER PRINCIPLE, RESIN ACID, AND UNSAPONIFIABLE
MATTER.
The bitter principle present in the oil is soluble in
water and alcoho! and is removable by washing with these
solvents. It is non-alkaloidal.
Saponification of the oil with alcoholic potash showed
an amount of insoluble deposit which proved to be the potash
salt of a resin acid. Solution in water and acidification
gave a brown resinous material, taken to be a resin-acid
anhydride.
The resin acid present is dissolvable in alcohol and
was obtained as a white non-crystalline resinous substance
insoluble in petroleum spirit. It amounted to 4.0 per
cent on the weight of the oil.
The unsaponifiable matter is a brown resinous oil.
THE INsoLuBLE Farry © Acips* were principally
liquid and had the following constants :—
Neutralisation Value, 200.6, equivalent to Mean
Molecular Weight, 279.5.
Iodine Value, 110.0.
Separated into their components, after removal of
resin acid as potash salt insoluble in excess of alcoholic
potash, there was obtained: liquid acids, 87 per cent ;
solid acids, 13 per cent.
Tue Liquip Farry Acrps. Iodine value, 119.0.
* Containing 4 per cent. of resin acid.
62 OIL-BEARING SEEDS INDIGENOUS TO QUEENSLAND.
The comparatively high iodine value points to the
presence of linoleic or linolenic acids.
In the products of oxidation by alkaline permanganate
were identified dioxystearic acid (M. Pt. 130° C.) and a
tetrahydroxy-stearic acid (sativic acid) (M. Pt. 156°-
160° C). No linolenic hexabromide was yielded in the
hexabromide test.
The liquid fatty acids are, therefore, oleic and linoleic
acids.
THe Souip Farry Acrps were fractionally crystallised
from alcohol and were obtained in successive portions.
melting from 60-62° C., approximating to the melting point
of palmitic acid, which is, therefore, the solid fatty acid
present.
No indication was obtained of the presence of laurie
acid, the glyceride of which constitutes a large portion
of other oils of the N. O. Laurtn# described, such as oils
of Laurus nobilis (common laurel oil), Litsea sebifera,
DL. Stocksii and L. zeylanica.
SUMMARY.
(1) The oil of the seeds of Hernandia biwalvis is associated
with a bitter principle, a resin acid, and a resin oil.
(2) It consists of olein, linolein and palmitin ; laurin,
which is a constituent of other oils of N. O. LauriInaé&,
is not present.
IV.—NOTE ON QUEENSLAND CANDLE-NUT OIL.
THE CANDLE Nout ( Aleurites moluccana or A. triloba
is widely distributed over the tropics of the Eastern Hemis-_
phere, and is exceedingly common in the northern scrubs
of coastal Queensland.
BY FRANK SMITH, B.SC., F.1.€. 63
The oil contained in the nut is of recognised value
for a variety of purposes. It belongs to the class of drying
oils typified by linseed oil, and besides being adapted
for burning and soap-making, is suitable for the prepara-
tion of oil-varnishes, paints and linoleum, in the manu-
facture of which linseed oil is largely utilised.
The cathartic properties that are generally recognised
as pertaining to both kernels and oil mitigate against
dietetic use. The nuts, however, were a common article
of diet among the Queensland aboriginal tribes, being princi-
pally utilised after roasting, the action of heat minimising
the deleterious effect.
The oil has been frequently described* but it has been
deemed worth while to make a brief examination of that
of Queensland origin from nuts kindly supplied by C. E.
Wood, Esq., of the Kamerunga State Nursery.
Extraction with petroleum ether gave 70 per cent
of pale yellow, limpid oil, a higher figure than generally
reported. .
Lewkowitsch gave 58.6 per cent ; Guthrie and Ramsay
found 59.93 per cent in a sample of Pacific Island nuts ;
and Wilcox and Thompson report a maximum of 66.25
per cent.
The following constants were determined :—
Saponification Value a. ae SO
Jodine Value .. = ne ee GOIES
Hexabromides .. ae on .. 13.2 per cent.
The iodine value agrees closely with the value given
by Lewkowitsch, viz., 163.7, and the yield of hexabromides
is markedly higher than the 7.28- 8.21 per cent
obtained by Walker and Warburton+, but below the value
for linseed oil (23 per cent).
* Lewkowitsch, “ Oils, Fats, and Waxes.” 3rd Edition, Vol. II.,
p. 468.
Guthrie and Ramsay. Agric. Gazette, N.S.W., 17 (1906), p. 859.
Wilcox and Thompson. Hawaii Agric. Exp. Stat. Bull 39 (1913).
{ Analyst, 1902, 237.
64 OIL-BEARING SEEDS INDIGENOUS TO QUEENSLAND.
Its drying power is undoubtedly high and but little
inferior to that of some qualities of linseed oil.
The assertion is warranted that the candle-nut in
Queensland constitutes an asset of considerable potential
value.
I desire to acknowledge the facilities kindly placed at
my disposal by the Agricultural Chemist, that have made
the prosecution of this work possible. .
A NOTE ON THE PRECAVAL SYSTEM OF
HYTA*CERULEA, White.
By Cc. D. GILLIES, B.Sc.
BroLogicaAL LABORATORY, UNIVERSITY, BRISBANE.
(Prana Vink)
( Read before the Royal Society of Queensland, August 14th,
1914.)
ON account of its suitability for dissection, considerable
numbers of Hyla cerulea are used in the Biology Department
of the University of Queensland. Most of the text books
on the anatomy of the frog (1), (2), (3), (4), describe species
of Rana, and’ H. cerulea is found to differ in some respects
from these. Considerable differences are shewn in the
arrangement of the precaval blood vessels, and as this
system had apparently not been previously described in
H. cerulea. Miss Freda Bage, M.Sc., while Acting Lecturer
in Biology at the University, suggested that I should
undertake this investigation.
A number of frogs were examined, but no appreciable
variations amongst the precaval systems of these was
observed, and both the right and the left were found to be
similar.
The precaval is formed by the union of three veins :—
A. Linevuau.—tThis vein is the most anterior, and runs
parallel to the long axis of the body, returning
blood from the tongue.
66 THE PRECAVAL SYSTEM OF HYLA CARULEA.
B. InNNoMINATE.—The mnominate is the median vein,
and is formed by the following :—
(1) External jugular. This opens into the origin
of the innominate, a short distance from the
junction of the latter with the precaval. It
is formed by :—
(a) Internal jugular, which returns blood from
the head; and the
(b) Mandibular, which comes from the lower
jaw and into which, near the suspensorium>
runs the maxillary vein from the upper
jaw.
(2) Subscapular. This vessel runs from the
muscles of the shoulder, and receives a vein
which returns blood from the muscles of the
shoulder and the skin. It is proposed to
term this vessel the somatic vetin.
C. SupcLtavian.—The subclavian is the most posterior
vein, and is formed by the following :—
(1) Brachial, which comes from the arm ;
(2) Musculo-cutaneous, which returns blood from
the walls of the abdomen and the skin; and
the
(3) Coracoid, a small vein running into the sub-
clavian, from the coracoid region.
In Southern Universities an allied species, H. aurea, is used
in teaching anatomy. On comparison of the precaval
system of H. cerulea with that of H. aurea, it is found that
both agree in the possession of a coracoid vein, though
Dr. Sweet (5) says that in H. aurea it is not always present,
and two may occur. Another point of resemblance is the
Lad
BY ©. D. GILLIES, B.SC. 67
possession in both forms of a branch from the skin, running
into the mandibular vein at the angle of the jaw. The
points of difference may be tabulated as follows :—
VPunWeas | h... H. coerulea. H. aurea.
| eee ea ee EE SS ———— |
Lingual ..| Flows directly into the pre- | Unites with the mandibular.
caval
smaller veins open in front |
SSS SSS |
| Only one present. Generally a number of |
| of the main vessel.
|
External ..' Runs into the innominate. Runs into the precaval.
Jugular ..| Formed by the mandibular | Formed by the mandibular
and the internal jugular. | and the lingual.
Innominate | Formed by the :inion of the | Formed by the union of the
subscapular and the exter-| subscapular and the inter- -
nal jugular. nal jugular.
Somatic ..| Present. | Absent.
The presence of the somatic vein in H. cerulea and its
absence in H. aurea is an important difference.
My thanks are due to Miss Freda Bage, M.Sc., and
Dr. T. Harvey Johnston for their kind assistance.
BIBLIOGRAPHY,
(1) Marshall, “ The Frog.”
(2) Parker and Haswell, “ Textbook of Zoology,” Vol. If.
(3) Thomson, ~ Outlines of Zoology.”
(4) Wells and Davies, “ A Textbook of Zoology.”
(5) Sweet, G., Proc. Roy. Soc., Victoria, XXI., 1908, p. 349.
PLATE VIII.
Fie. !.—Sketch of a dissection of Hyla cerulea from the ventral surface,
shewing the precaval system.
Fic. 2.—Diagrammatic representation of the precaval system of Hyla
cerulea.
65
THE PRECAVAL SYSTEM OF HYLA CRULBA.
I
REFERENCE TO LETTERING.
vein from the skin
brachial vein
. body wall
coracoid vein
external jugular vein
hyoid bone
internal jugular vein
innominate vein
. intestine
lingual vein
lung
liver
left auricle
maxillary vein
ma,
ml.
me.
p-
ra.
mandibular vein
muscle
musculo-cutaneous vein
precaval vein
right auricle
somatic vein
subclavian vein
skin
stomach
subscapular vein
sinus yenosus
truncus arteriosus
thyroid gland
ventricle
Proc. Roy. Soc. Q’LAND., VOL. XXVI. Puate VIII.
te
sha ae
NOTES AND EXHIBITS.
(Before the Royal Society of Queensland, August 14th,
1914).
ENDOPARASITES (TREMATODA).
Dr. T. Harvey Johnston exhibited specimens of a
trematode, Dolichosaccus ischyrus, J. 8. Jnstn, which he
had collected from the intestine of the common green frog,
Hyla cerulea, in the Brisbane district. This species was
described by Dr. 8. J. Johnston (Proc. Linn. Soc., N.S.
Wales, 36, 1912, p. 313, pl. 17), whose material was obtained
from the same species of frog as well as from another in
the neighbourhood of Sydney, N.S. Wales. The parasite
is here recorded for the first time as occurring in Queensland.
He also exhibited specimens of a large trematode taken
by Mr. A. C. Bligh, from the swim-bladder of a fresh-water
catfish (Siluroid), Copidoglanis tandanus, caught in the
Condamine River, near Warwick, Queensland. These
parasites, which were obtained in February, 1911, through
the kindness of the Government Entomologist, Mr. Henry
Tryon. have proved to be a species of Jsoparorchis. This
genus was recently established by Southwell (Rec. Indian
Museum 9 (2), 1913, pp. 91-95), for the reception of. a
species. I. tristmilitubis, Southwell, which was taken from
the air-bladder of a fresh-water siluroid, Wallago attu, at
Bankipur, in Northern India. It is of interest to find very
closely related species of this genus occurring in freshwater
catfish in two such widely-separated localities as India and
Queensland. A full description of the Queensland species
will be published by Dr. 8. J. Johnston, of the Sydney
University.
ADDITIONS TO THE ROTIFERA OF QUEENSLAND.
By W. R. COLLEDGE.
(Read before the Royal Socrety of Queensland, September
’ 28th, 1914.
THE present paper brings before the Society a few
additions I have made to the known Rotifera of our State.
In the year 1889, Surgeon Gunson Thorpe visited Brisbane,
and subsequently gave to this Society two papers containing
a list of 23 of these interesting microscopic animals. Four
years ago I gave a paper extending the number to 102,
IT am now able to add 32, thus bringing the total up to 134
species. There are probably about 1,000 species which
have been identified. These are distributed over all parts
of the world. No country can claim exclusively any
particular species. Some of the same kinds, found in Africa
and Australia. were found on Ross Island in the Antarctic
regions by Mr. James Murray. Some specimens were got
from the bottom of a lake which had been solidly frozen
for an unknown number of years. Fifteen feet of solid ice
were bored before the layer of mud was reached in which
they lay, but they recovered, and came to life immediately
they were placed in water. At Padua, in Italy, ten species
were found living in the hot springs at a temperature from
35° to 45° Centigrade. Thus, though of remarkably delicate
and complicated organisation, they are capable of existing
under a wide range of temperature.
BY W. RB. COLLEDGE. 71
LIST OF QUEENSLAND ROTIFERA.
The additions now made are marked with an asterisk,
while those originally contributed by Gunson Thorpe are
marked thusf.
- OrpER I.—RHIZOTA.
Family 1.—FLoscciariaD&.
+ Floscularia coronetta. Cubstt.
longicaudata. Hudson.
29
7 ornata. Ehrenberg.
s campanulata. Dobie.
+ trilobata. Collins.
2?
Stephanoceros eichornii. Ehrenberg.
Family 2.—MELICERTAD&.
as
Melicerta conifera. Hudson.
Tj a ringens. Schrank.
oe a tubicola. Ehrenberg.
+ Limnias annulatus. Bailey.
ati 3 ceratophylli. Schrank.
* Cephalosiphon limnias. Ehrenberg.
(Becistes brachiatus. Hudson.
crystallinus. hrenberg.
* Lacinularia elliptica. Shepherd.
- a racemovata.
ad e socialis. Ehrenberg.
** Megalotrocha alboflavicans. Elbrenberg.
% “ semibulla. Thorpe.
af a. spinoza. ‘Thorpe.
Conochilus dossuaris. Hudson.
= unicornis. Rousselet.
23
volvox. Ehrenberg.
OrpgER I1.—BDELLOIDA.
Family. PHILODINADA,
Philodina citrina. Ehrenberg,
2 megalotrocha. Ehrenberg,
Rotifer vulgaris. Schrank.
Actinurus neptunius. Ehrenberg.
Disp thes Wee
72
ADDITIONS TO THE ROTIFERA OF QUEENSLAND
Orpver IIL—PLOIMA.
Sub-Order, Jlloricata.
Family. Microprpz.
Microdida chlana.
Family. ASPLANCHNAD AL.
Asplanchna amphora. Hudson.
amphora, male.
brightwellir.
intermedia. Hudson.
2?
9?
99
Asplanchnopus myrmelio.
Be - male.
Sacculus viridis. Gosse.
Syncheta ovalis.
stylata. Wierz.
tremula. Ehrenberg.
99
93
Family. TRIARTHRAD.
Polyarthra platyptera. Ehrenberg.
Triarvthra longiseta. Khrenberg.
Cyrtonia tuba. Rousselet.
Family. HyDATINAD2®
Notops brachionus. Ehrenberg.
\ clavulatus. Ehrenberg.
Triphylus lacustris. Ehrenberg.
male,
Family. NoTAMMATAD®
Taphrocampa annulosa. Gosse.
Notammata aurita. Ehrenberg.
clavulata. Whrenberg.
- brachionus. _Khrenberg.
Copeus copeus. Ehrenberg.
A. cerberis. Gosse.
= pachyurus. Gosse.
Celopus brachyurus.
Diglena forevpata.
Ss grandis.
Hosphora aurita. UWhrenberg, ;
digitata.
9?
*
BY W. R. COLLEDGE. 73
Furcularia longiseta. Ehrenberg.
a equales. Elirenberg.
be forficula. Ehrenberg.
melandicus.
aS microphus.
Proales parasitica. Ehrenberg.
? sordida. Gosse.
Triopthalmus dorsualis. Ehrenberg.
Sub-Order. JLoricata.
Family. RatTrvLipa.
Rattulis hicornis. Ehrenberg.
“3 hicristata.
3 birostris.
- carinatus. Ehrenberg.
- elongata. Gosse.
* mucosus. Ehrenberg.
S. tigris. Miiller.
Diurella porcellus. Gosse.
Family. DiInocHaRiIp&.
Dinecharis tetractis. Ehrenberg.
- collinsit. Gosse.
Scaridium eudactylotum. Gosse.
ns longicaudum. Ehrenberg.
Stephanops intermedius. Burn.
Family. SALPINADZ.
Diachiza ceca. Gosse.
i paeta. Gosse.
Ms semiaperta. Gosse.
Salpina brevispina. Ehrenberg.
+ cortina.
; eustaia. Gosse.
macracantha. Gosse.
Ny ventralis.
Diplax trigona. Gosse.
Diplois daviesie. Gosse.
Family. EucHLANAD®.
Euchlanis dilatata. Ehrenberg.
55 oropha.
* triquetra. Ehrenberg.
74 ADDITI
se
*
*
Cathypna
39
9
Monostyla
9
99>
2?
ONS TO THE ROLIFERA OF QUEENSLAND
Family. CATHYPNADZ.
brachydactyla. Stenross.
leontina.
luna. Ehrenhkerg
ungulala.
hulla. Gosse.
cornuta. Ehrenberg.
lunaris. Ehrenberg.
quadridentata. Ehrenberg.
Family. CoLuRID2.
Colurus amblytelus. Gosse.
79
dactylotus. Gosse.
fs deflexus. Ehrenberg.
Metopidia
9°
Cochleave t
Pterodina
>
acuminata. Ehrenberg.
lepadella. Ehrenberg.
oblonga.
ovalis.
ohioensis.
oaxysternum. Gosse.
solidus. Gosse.
triptera. Ehrenberg.
urbo.
Family. PTreRODINAD#.
incisa. ‘'Ternety.
reflexa. Gosse.
patina. Ehrenberg.
Family. BRACHIONID&.
Brachionus angularis. Gosse.
bakerti. Ehrenberg.
falcatus. Zacharius.
militaris. Ehrenberg.
pala. Ehrenberg.
.. var. amphiceros.
rubens. Ehrenberg.
urceolus. Ehrenberg.
Noteus quadricornis. Ehrenberg.
>i
BY W. R. COLLEDGE.
~i
-
Family. ANURZADZ.
+ Anurea aculeata. Ehrenberg.
» Ep no ventral spines.
a cochlearis. Gosse.
- tecla. Gosse.
Family. PLEOSOMAD2.
Pleosoma lenticulares. Vorce and Herrick.
Gastropus minor.
35 stylifer.
Anapus ovalis,
OrpDER. SCIRTOPODA.
Family. PEDALIONID.
+ Pedalion mirum. Hudson.
+
=i
Trochosphera equatorialis. Semper.
A. 4s male.
SOME NEW QUEENSLAND ENDOPARASTTES.*
By T. HARVEY JOHNSTON, M.A., D.Sc., F.L.S.
BrioLoGy DEPARTMENT, UNIVERSITY, BRISBANE.
(Prats TX Xe)
( Read before the Roytl Society of Queenslana November
9th, 1914)
Spheruterina punctata n. sp.
(Pl. IX., figs 1-13.)
From the intestine of a ‘“ thickhead”’ or *‘ whistler,”
Pachycephala rufwentris Lath, shot at Caloundra, August,
1914, there were collected numerous pale translucent
cestodes reaching about 4 cm in length, and about
.65 mm in maximum breadth. The posterior segments
readily separated off from the rest of the strobila owing
to the presence of very deep constrictions. Each ripe
proglottid was seen to contain in its anterior half a dark
or brownish rounded egg capsule, this “‘ spotted ” appear-
ance suggesting its specific name.
Scolex.—The scolex, whose breadth is .31 mm, bears
prominent suckers and rostellum, capable of being with-—
drawn into a powerful muscular rostellar sac. The rostellum
is provided with two scries of hooks, those in the anterior
circlet being larger than those forming the second row, with
which they alternate. There are ten or twelve in each
series. The hooks of the first circlet are rather wide and
*The types of the new species described in this paper as well as in a
former paper, ‘‘ Notes on some Entozox,” Proc. Roy. Soc. Queensland,
XXIV., 1912, pp. 68-91, have beea dep: sited in ‘he Queensland Museum,
Brishane.
BY T. HARVEY JOHNSTON, M.A., D.SC., F.1..S. at
measure .07 mm from the tip of the claw to the dorsal root.
Those of the other set are .45 mm Jong, and have a differ-
ent shape, the claw being shorter and more strongly cur-
ved. They more closely resemble those described from
species of Biuterina than do the anterior hooks. The
dorsal and ventral roots are considerably thickened in both
sets.
Strobila -—An unsegmented neck is absent. lmme-
diately behind the scolex, proglottids measure nearly .2 mm
in width, and though short, are quite distinct. Sexually
mature joints are about .13 mm in length and .3 mm in
maximum breadth. They gradually become relatively
longer, until their dimensions are about .4 mm = and
.5 mm respectively. Mature segments, found free in
the intestine, were about .75 mm long and .7 mm wide,
their shape being that of a triangle with the apex removed.
The large egg capsule occupies the apical region, unless it
has been already extruded. The _ postero-lateral edges
of older segments project freely. The amount of over-
lapping is small.
Genital pores alternate irregularly and lie marginally
just in front of the middle of the proglottid. There
is a genital cloaca. Only rarely can a genital papilla be
seen.
Calcareous corpuscles of at least two kinds, large
and small, are to be found in the cortex. The former,
which are rare, are somewhat disc-shaped with radiating
depressions on the surface, and may measure as much as
02 mm. The smaller ones are fairly common and possess
the usual rounded or elliptical outline. They measure
about .007-.008 mm by .005-.004 mm.
The -longitudinal musculature is arranged in two
concentric series of rather large bundles, the individual
bundles, as well as the series, being close to one another.
Transverse fibres are to be seen occasionally in sections,
their position being internal to the longitudinal series.
The ventral excretory canal 1s relatively very wide,
the small dorsal vessel being directly above it. The
latter has a more sinuous course than the former. A
78 SOME NEW QUEENSLAND ENDOPARASITES.
wide transverse vessel connects the ventral canals near
the posterior end of each segment. The main longitudinal
nerve is situated immediately dorso-laterally to the ventral
canal of the corresponding side. The sexducts pass between
the excretory vessels and dorsally to the nerve.
Male genitalia :—There are about eight testes each
30-40 uw in diameter, lying behind the ovary and uterus,
but above the vitellarium. | Occasionally some occur in the
medulla between, and laterally from, the excretory canals.
The vas deferens becomes considerably coiled on the
pore side of the uterus and paruterine organ. It lies above
and close to the vagina, its course being approximately
parallel to it. Both of these ducts pass outwards just
dorsally to the nerve and ventral vessel, the vas deferens
entering the small cirrus sac within whose inner portion
it becomes coiled. The cirrus sac is a pyriform structure,
25-30 mw in maximum width and 50-60 yw in length. Its
musculature is weak. The organ does not extend inwardly
as far as the excretory canals. It contains a small cirrus.
The male pore lies at the bottom of a genital cloaca, its
position being immediately dorsal or antero-dorsal te the
female aperture.
Female organs :—The small bilobed ovary hes in the
anterior part of the segment, in front of the testes. It
is not median but is situated in an oblique position nearer
the pore-bearing edge. The vitellarium is placed poster-
iorly below the testes.
From the female aperture which lies just below the
male pore, the vagina travels inwards below and beside
the vas deferens and immediately above the nerve and
ventral excretory canal. A small receptaculum seminis
may be recognisable. The vagina bends slightly back-
wards.
The uterus appears near the centre of the segment
but rather towards the aporal side, just in front of, and
ventrally to the testes, but behind the ovary. It is a
simple spherical sac. As it develops the testes and ovary
soon disappear. A mass of altered parenchyma makes
its appearance antero-ventrally from the uterus, this paru-
BY T. HARVEY JOHNSTON, M.A., D.SC., F.L.S. 79
terine organ developing rapidly. At first it is a short,
narrow, longitudinally-placed, more or less median, mass
of tissue, becoming tubular. The position of the uterus
undergoes alteration, this organ being gradually displaced
so as to lie in the posterior part of the proglottid, though
occasionally it remains in the middle of the segment as a
very large simple sac with numerous ripe eggs within it.
The anterior part of the paruterine organ undergoes
differentiation to form an expanded rounded capsule,
the tubular portion becoming wider and more sinuous.
This capsule is sharply marked off from the surrounding
tissues, especially laterally and anteriorly. It increases
in size and ultimately occupies most of the medulla of
the anterior part of the segment. Its dimensions while
within the proglottis vary from .22 by .14 mm to .30
by .24 mm. Some which had been extruded from the
segment measured .4 by .3 mm.
The capsule consists of an outer coarse layer which
stains very deeply with eosin and of an inner zone which
retains the hematoxylin dye. It is within the latter
that the eggs come to lie imbedded. The outer layer
does not cover the posterior face of the capsule, the egg-
containing tissues being in continuity with the paruterine
organ, through which the eggs have travelled from the uterus
to the capsule. The peripheral region of the inner zone
of the capsule possesses numerous rod-like structures re-
sembling crystalloids, but they do not polarive light. Eggs
may occur in this peripheral area. A few fusiform granular
bodies were seen in this layer in several capsules.
The paruterine organ has a vacuolate appearance
and has what seems to be an axial series of nuclei. The
contents of the tube appear to be albuminous.
Ripe eggs are to be found in the capsule and more
or less commonly in the uterus.
They measure from .035 by .080 mm to .040 by .035
mm., the contained oncosphere being about .024 mm. in
diameter. The embryonal hooklets are .010-.012 mm
long, with a long claw whose length is equal to the distance
between the dorsal and ventral roots.
80 SOME NEW QUEENSLAND ENDOPARASITES.
Systematic :—The parasite belongs to the Paruter-
inide, but differs from the armed genera, Biuterina, Paru-
terina and Culcitella. The arrangement of the excretory
canals is characteristic in the last named. ‘The uterus is
simple in our form whereas it is more or less completely
bilobed in Biuterina and crescentic or else rather broader
than long in Paruterina. Besides. the testes are numerous
in the last named two genera whereas they are few in the
cestode from Pachycephala. it appears to resemble
Rhabdometra in many ways, but the latter has an unarmed
scolex.
The new genus for which the name Spheruterina is
proposed, may be characterised as follows :—Paruterinide ;
rostellum armed with two rows of hooks; genital pores
alternating irregularly ; genital ducts passing between the
excretory canals and dorsally to the longitudinal nerve ;
testes few, situated behind the female organs; uterus
rounded and simple; paruterine organ terminating in an
anteriorly-situated capsule—near Paruterina and Biuterina.
In birds.
Type: Spheruterina punctata Jnstn from Pachy-
cephala rufwentris Lath.
Thelastomum alatum n. sp. (Oxyuride.)
(Pl, X., Gigs. 3-7.)
From the intestine of the larva of a Cetonid beetle,
Cacachroa decorticata Macl, from Cairns, North Queensland,
collected by Mr A. A. Girault, and forwarded through the
Director of the Queensland Museum, Brisbane.
Female :—Total length 2.9 mm; the tail, 7.e., from
the anus to the posterior end of the parasite, being .9 mm.
(figs. 3, 5.) The female is rather a stout worm whose
anterior end is gradually narrowed. The posterior region
becomes strongly constricted to form a long, almost
straight, sabre-like tail of fairly uniform width except
at th> end. where it is pointed. The greatest breadth
is the region of the vagina (about .20 mm). This organ
terminates on a relatively large, backwardly projecting
prominence situated in the posterior half of the body,
about .6 mm in front of the anus.
BY T. HARVEY JOHNSTON, M.A., D.Su., F.L.S. 8I
The mouth is borne on a small, projecting ring well
marked off from the rest of the body. The pharynx, in-
cluding the gizzard, has a length of .50 mm. Just prior
to entering the latter, it narrows somewhat. The pyri-
form gizzard has a diameter of .09 mm, and is marked off
from the rest of the pharynx by a constriction. The
“intestine is wide and croplike in its anterior portion, with a
diameter of .15 mm, soon becoming narrowed to about
half this. The nerve ring lies at .2 mm behind the mouth,
while the excretory pore is situated in the region of the
gizzard at about .4 mm behind the mouth. The short
common excretory duct has a somewhat sinuous course.
The ovary can be traced from the dorsal region near
the anus, where it may form a loop, forwards almost to the
gizzard. Here it turns back almost to the anus in a more
ventral position than before. Fertilisation occurs in this
region and the duct travels anteriorly as a wide uterus
crowded with eggs, commonly arranged in two _ rows,
terminating at the female genital pore, which, as already
stated, lies on an eminence. Ripe eggs measure about .08
by .05 mm.
Male:—The male 1s very small, measuring from
.97 to 1.17 mm. in length, the maximum breadth being
about .09 mm. (Figs. 4, 6,7.) The anus projects strongly,
and behind it the body is narrowed rapidly to form a short
tail .06 mm long, whose anterior half is much broader than
the posterior half. The latter terminates in a fine point.
The former 1s arched dorsally and at its junction with the
posterior part is a pair of tail papille. At each
side of the hind portion of body is a prominent ala,
which, just in front of the anal region, is somewhat arched
and expanded. It becomes narrowed and then again
widened to form a rather thin rounded lobe lying above the
anus and terminating at the base of the tail. The nerve
ring is situated at about .09 mm, and the excretory aper-
ture at about .17 mm from the anterior end. The testis
is relatively large. The male spiculum measures .045 mm
and is clubshaped and slightly curved, its point being
sharp. There appear to be a pair of small papille
in the neighbourhood of the anus.
82 SOME NEW QUEENSLAND ENDOPARASITES.
Spiroptera megastoma Rud.
From a tumour in the stomach of a horse, Eidsvold,
Burnett River, collected by Dr. T. L. Bancroft. This
species, though probably not uncommon, is apparently
now recorded for the first time as occurring in Queensland.
Agamonema sp.
(Pl XX), figs) 123
A small number of white ellipsoid cysts were taken
recently from Hyla cerulea caught in Brisbane (Oct, 1914).
They were lying more or less loosely in the wall of the stomach, —
just below the peritoneum. Each contained a single
nematode, probably a Spiroptera, lying in its central area,
surrounded by a tough fibrous coat, the “worm area ”
being about half the diameter of the cyst. The largest
cyst measured .9 mm by nearly .7 mm and the smallest
.65 by .47 mm.
By teasing out the capsule, the contained worm was
liberated. The following account 1s based upon the largest
parasite obtained.
Length 3.10 mm; breadth .010 mm. The body is
finely annulate, the rings being, however, scarcely recog-
nisable anteriorly. The anterior end is rounded and only
slightly attenuated while the posterior extremity is pointed,
there being a short tail, .010 mm, in front of whose end
lies the anus. The three lips each bear a small labial
papilla, not readily detected. Delicate longitudinal
strie are recognisable on the cuticle of the body.
There is a relatively long tubular pharynx, .43 mm
in length, terminating in a slight swollen portion. The
anterior end of the intestine is rounded, a deep constriction
separating it from the pharynx. The cloaca extends in-
wards for .075 mm from the anus and is lined by a thick
cuticle which is so disposed that it has the appearance of
two approximately equal spicules with rounded or clublike
inner ends separated from each other, and with sharp outer
extremities. It is possible that these may be two male
spicules or a single deeply-grooved seta with a bifurcate
end.
BY T. HARVEY JOHNSTON, M.A., D.SC., F.L.S. 83
The nerve ring lies at a distance of .015 mm_ behind
the mouth, and immediately in front of the ring is the
excretory aperture.
This larval parasite appears to belong to the Spirop-
teridz and is included for the present under the collective
generic name, Agamonema.
Echinorhynchus h'le un sp.
(Pix, figs. §, 9)
A solitary specimen of this species was found recently,
encysted just below the peritoneal surface of the liver of
a frog, Hyla cerulea, caught near Brisbane. The white
cylindrical cyst measured 1.4 mm _ in length and about
.5 mm in width.
Though the parasite was in a larval stage, yet enough
of its anatomy was recognised to justify naming it. I
have compared it with an Echinorhynch which was
described by me in 1912,* froma Hyla aurea caught near
Sydney some years ago and am satisfied that the two
belong to the same species. They have the same
size and general appearance. The characters of the ros-
tellum are described there. In our present specimen
this organ is not fully everted but the hooks on its
base correspond in shape, size and arrangement with those
similarly placed in the case of the former parasite (fig.9).
The rostellar sac with the introverted rostellum
measured .9 mm in length. One giant nucleus was dis-
tinctly seen, and there appeared to be a second one present.
Each lemniscus measured .) mm, being of about the same
length as the introverted proboscis. They were rather
shorter than those present in the specimen from Hyla aurea.
The suspensory ligament and associated organs were con-
siderably coiled and consequently the details of structure
were not satisfactorily made out. Sex glands were not
recognised, though the vas deferens, vesicula, and the re-
latively large copulatory bursa were to be seen. The walls
of the bursa were -hick and much folded internally. The
general anatomy is shown in pl. X. fig. 8.
*Proc Roy. Soc. Queensland, XXIV., 1912, pp. 84-S5, pl. II. figs. 9, 10
84
Pease or Be,
SOME NEW QUEENSLAND ENDOPARASITES.
PiatE, IX.
Spheruterina punctata n. sp.
Eggs.
fat}
Ripe proglottis, showing capsule; also eggs in uterus.
Free segment showing capsule almost extruded.
Scolex.
Hooks of first series.
Hooks of second series.
Segment showing genitalia.
Segments showing developing paruterine organ.
Longit. horiz. sect. of segment.
Part of fig. 10, more highly magnified.
Trans. sect. segment, showing capsule.
Trans. sect. segment, showing genital pore.
PuaTE. X.
Agamonema sp. trom Hyla cerulea.
Anterior end.
Posterior end.
Thelastomum alutum u. sp.
Female worm.
Male worm—same magnification as fig. 3.
Female, anterior end.
Male, anterior end, same magnification as fig. 5.
Male, posterior end, same magnification as fig. 6.
Hchinerhyuchus hyle n. sp.
Entire specimen.
Hooks from base of rostellum—seen from various posit‘ons.
REFERENCE TO LETTERING.
a, anus; al., ala; b., bursa; c., capsule; c.c., calcareous corpuscle ;
cr., ? crystalloids; ¢.s., cirrus sac; cu., cuticle; d.y., dorsal excretory
vessel; e., egg; e.l.c., egg--ontaining layer of capsule; e.p., excretory
pore; g., gizzard; g.n., giant nucleus; g.c., genital cloaca; g.p., genital
pore; i., intestine; 1., lip; lem., lemniscus; lm., lm. 1., lm. 2., longi-
tudinal muscle bundles; m., muscle; n., nerve; n.r., nerve ring; o.l.c.,
outer layer of capsule; ov., ovary; p., pharynx; p.s., proboscis sheath ;
p-0., paruterine organ; r., rostellum; r.s., receptaculum seminis; s.,
sucker ; s.l., suspensory ligament; sp., spicule; t., testis; t.m., trans-
verse muscle; t.p., tail papille; t.v., transverse excretory vessel; u.,
uterus ; v., vagina; v.d., vas deferens ; v.g., vitelline gland ; v.s., vesicula
seminalis; v.v., ventral excretory vessel.
Proc. Roy. Soc. Q’LanD., VoL. XXvVI. PLatEe LX:
>. Tr aval s J if rv
Proc. Roy. Soc. Q’LAND., VoL. xXvI.
rm
ms ‘ysis MM
J
‘AT
A
THE FREEZING POINT OF SOME
MILKS.
ABNORMAT,
By J. 8. HENDERSON, F.I.C.. and
L. A, MESTON.
( Read before the Royal Society of Queensland, November 9th,
1914.)
On the 15th May, 1914, among several samples of milk
submitted for analysis in the
Laboratory,
Government
Chemical
Brisbane, by a Food Inspector, were two,
from different sources, which gave the following results
on analysis :—
Total Solids
Fat
Solids not ae:
Ash
Nitrogen .. uF
Ghieride in Ash
Clears ny Ash as NaCl
Ratio —
j Ash
Ratio SNE
Freezing Point ..
Composition of Solids not fat —
Milk Sugar
Proteids.
Ash
his
3.
.74 per cent |
.80 per cent | |
oon
99
ame
37
2
10.
0.
49.
Suen
| 10.
No. 4349.
(6 cows)
60 per cent |
86 per cent
.49 per cent |
6 per cent
-2 per cent |
.68
3
55°C
2 per cent
3 per cent
3 per cent
i
ol
38
10
No. 4353
(2 cows)
.69 per cent
.90 per cent
.79 per cent
.78 per cent
.47 per cent
-6 per cent
.2 per cent
68
54°C
.4 per cent
.4 per cent
-O per cent
86 THE FREEZING POINT OF SOME ABNORMAL MILKS.
The fat, solids not fat, and nitrogen are all low, while
the ash is just a shade above normal and the proportion
of chlorine in the ash much above normal. The freezing
point is however in each case practically normal.
At first glance the analytical results seem to indicate
that each milk is a milk which has been watered, and a
little common salt added to lower the freezing point again
to normal. Added water, if calculated on the basis of a
normal solids not fat of 8.9 per cent., in sample “A”
would reach 13 per cent. The excess of salt present in
the sample would lower the freezing point to cover an
addition of 12.5 per cent. of added water. Similarly
added water in sample “B” if calculated on the 8.9
solids not fat standard would reach 12.5 per cent., while
the excess of salt present would lower the freezing point
to cover 12 per cent. of added water. In each case there
is a remarkable agreement between the deduction made
from the solids not fat standard and that from the excess
of salt.
As against the weight of analytical evidence for
adulteration there stands the fact that the freezing point
was in each case normal and that it would probably be
beyond the skill of any dairyman to exactly adjust the
freezing point of the mixture of water and milk.
The attention of the Commissioner of Public Health
was called to the peculiar facts of these two cases, and it
was decided to investigate each case further.
It was found that the samples were from the same
district, sample “ A” being the mixed milk from six cows,
and “ B”’ the mixed milk from two cows.
Twelve days after the legal samples were taken, a food
inspector familiar with the milking of cows attended in
the afternoon at each dairy, saw each cow milked and
*“ stripped,”’ and measured and sampled the milk from
each cow. ‘The mixed milk in each herd was unfortunately
not sampled, the results given for the mixed milk in the
following table being calculated from the individual yield.
87
BY J. B. HENDERSON, F.I.C., AND L. A. MESTON.
queo rad ¢°g 0°6 8°8 ce P°8 6°81 6°L | Ul < a U8y
quso sad .g* pe G6E 6° LE 2° OF | G'9g 8° LF z°98 | 0°0S 2 SplojOLg
queo tad g*ae y'1g¢ é €9 P'1g 0°S¢ rash g°9¢ 8'8é a ieang TN
“TN'S Jo uorisodur0g
Do89S"0- | 0.099'0- | 0.099°0- | 0.029°0- | O.z89'0- | 0.099°0- | De8tS°0- | O.GtS'0- y qulog Surz00.1 yy
detoe
£°8 0'°6 8°8 €°8 #8 6S 6'°L Deut a TNS oey
OOT X 48V
oF Sealine arOo8 ae 1g UZ oF L's - ae ory
queo wed = () ¢Z 9°18 | ¥'SE $59Z 61g $°LP {htt g°98 JORPN 8B “oye ouTLOTY/)
quod wed) P] 2°61 L‘61 ree 0°61 Mega r'F1 dard < ysy Ul euLopYyO
yuao wed ZG" () eo"0 | 0¢ 0 geo L¥O 8h’ 0 0S'0 z9°0 ps AY u950 141N
qaeo tad ¢1°¢ 9L°0 | tL'0 LL‘0 69°0 68°0 OL*O 88°0 ee a “sy
yued wad 68 P'S #°8 Z°6 z°8 9 8°8 6'L a: yey you sprog
qaoo sod =" F OF Le 9°P Le 8°Z O'F 0'¢ Me aie + Qe
queo wed 6" Z] ¥ GI ral 8S 6°II Z'°6 8S 6S ge “* sprog [ezO],
oS Se Fe ees = rr tee -
g | € ¢ t I fe G (squent)) PjPlA
UN AIGA
JeULtON Pest 9 ¢ t € é 1 “BAMOD)
(SMOO 9)—'v¥ GYUAH
88 THE FREEZING POINT OF SOME ABNORMAL MILKS.
HERD B.i2 COWS.)
Cows: Ly + he a) S) aie Normal
| | Milk. Milk.
Yield. 2 quarts. | 1.5 pint. |
| .
Total Solids RS 12.4, 7 ly Os9 12.2 12.9 per cent
Fat .. ms ae AOL a ameter acs 4.0 4.0 per cent
Solids not tat we 8.4 Uoll 8.2 8.9 per cent
Ash dis se 0.73 0.75 0.73 0.75 per cent
Nitrogen .. fe 0.48 0.55 0.49 0.52 per cent
Chlorine in Ash .. 19.0 31.9 21.0 14.0 per cent
Chlorine Cale. as NaCl 31.3 5} 1 34.6 23.0 per cent
Ash
Ratio NAOIT an oral | 1.9 2.8 4.6
_ Ashx 100 |
Ratio a 5 oa 8.7 10.5 8.9 8.3
Freezing Point .. —0.54°C|} -0.54°C; -0.54°C) —0.555°C
Composition of 8.N.F.
Milk Sugar .. 54.8 40.0 52.9 52.8 per cent
Proteids hs 36.4 49.4 38.1 37.8 per cent
Ash (P- oe 8.3 10.5 8.9 8.3 per ceat
These results clearly show that the samples originally .
received, while below the legal minimum standard at which
milk may be sold, had not been adulterated by the addition
of added water.
The causes of the abnormality seem to have been
similar in each case. In each, the cows got most of their
food by grazing on the roads and vacant lands in their
vicinity, and although the dairies were nearly two miles
apart. the soil in the district is very poor, and the grass,
therefore, probably poor in both quantity and quality.
The food supply of the cows may therefore be safely taken
as having been below normal.
Most of the cows were nearing the end of their period of
lactation which is recorded as the period when “ salty ”
milk is generally noted.
The inspector reported that cow No. 3 in Herd “A”
was obviously sick.
The only cow giving milk which could be classed as
normal was No. 2 of Herd “ A.”
The striking feature of these results is that from
eight cows, seven of them being apparently in good health,
only one cow gives milk which is normal. All the others
BY J. B. HENDERSON, F.1.C., AND L. A. MESTON. 89
are abnormal, particularly in the high proportion of chlorine
present. But by far the most striking feature of these
results is that although the milks vary so far from the normal
in chemical composition, the freezing point is practically
normal throughout. The mammary glands of the cow,
when unable to obtain the correct proportion of milk,
sugar and other foodstuffs, adjust the osmotic pressure
by adding an extra proportion of common salt from the
blood.
It is evident from the amount of work which has been
done by many workers m this direction, and the cases
quoted give further proof. that certain organs of secretion
work at definite osmotic pressures. This pressure is
practically a constant, the variation being within extremely
narrow limits. In the case of milk from the cow, the varia-
tion measured by the well known Freezing Point method
lies between —0.54°C. and —0.56°C. — This is the first case
in many tests where we have found the Freezing Point
of an undoubtedly genuine milk to be higher than —0.55°C.
Still an extremely rare variation of 0.01°C. from the normal
is not serious in the use of the Freezing Point as a factor
in milk analysis.
It cannot be too strongly impressed on milk analysts
that the mammary glands of the cow work almost entirely
to a constant osmotic pressure, the constituents which
produce the pressure varying according to the nature
and amount of the food supply and also according to the
period of lactation. So far as it is at present known there
is no other constant controlling factor, We found exactly
the same osmotic pressure (measured by the Freezing
Point) in genuine milks which varied between 6.4 per cent
solids not fat with 2.8 per cent fat and 9.7 per cent solids
not fat with 5.6 per cent fat. The fact of the osmotic
pressure being the one steady controlling factor in milk
production having been definitely established, it is obviously
absurd to continue judging the purity of a milk from the
determination of factors which are variant and not con-
stants. As the determination of the Freezing Point gives
an easy and accurate method of measuring the osmotic
pressure, the Freezing Point is obviously the constant
factor which should be used in judging the purity of milk.
G
90 THE FREEZING POINT OF SOME ABNORMAL MILKS.
Fortunately ‘n Australia we not only insist on purity
of milk but on quality, and milk is not allowed to be sold
from a cow which has to adjust the osmotic pressure with
an extra proportion of common salt or to keep itself warm
in the absence of sufficient food or shelter by consuming
fat which should have gone into the milk. It is therefore
necessary to determine the ordinary factors, fat, solids
not fat. ete., but these are not used and should not be used
in determining the purity of the milk.
We put these analyses on record to once more emphasise
the fact which we have previously noted (Proceedings of
the Australasian Association for the Advancement of Science,
Vol. XII., page 160 and Vol. XIII., page 88, and the
Proceedings of the Royal Society of Queensland, Vol.
XXIV., page 165), that the determination of the Freezing
Point of a milk is not only the most important factor to
determine in milk analysis, but is the only factor which
definitely settles whether or not water has been added
to the milk, and is the only one which gives a close
approximation to the proportion of water which has been
added.
In the case of the two samples recorded the sellers,
if judged by the old solids-not-fat standard, would certainly
have been convicted for selling milk adulterated with water.
As it was they were not prosecuted but action was taken
by the Health Department to prevent the further sale
of these abnormal milks to the general public.
FURTHER NEW GENERA AND SPECIES OF
AUSTRALIAN PROCTOTRYPOIDEA
By ALAN P. DODD.
(Read before the Royal Society of Queensland, November
9th, 1914.)
DurinG the present year, I have been enabled to collect
Micro-Hymenoptera in various parts of Queensland and
New South Wales, and have thus acquired numerous new
species, besides extending the known range of many other
species. I have also a small collection kindly given by
Mr. W.. W. Froggatt, Government Entomologist of New
South Wales. While in Sydney I had the pieasure of
looking through the collections of the Macleay Museum,
describing a few species from its material. I have ‘to thank
the Curator, Mr. J. Shewan, for his kindness in assisting
me with my work.
Still further species have been added from the well-
worked locality of Gordonvale (late Nelson), North Queens-
land, by Mr. A. A. Girault and myself.
Unless otherwise specified, the magnification used
was 2 inch objective, | inch ocular, Bausch and Lomb.
Family SCELIONIDA.
Subfamily Scelionin e.
Genus MALLATELEIA, Dodd.
MALLATELEIA FERSTERI, sp. nov.
f ¢ Length, 1.70 mm.
Brownish yellow, the head black, the scutum, scutel-
lum, and abdomen (except 3rd segment), dusky black, the
femora slightly dusky.
92 AUSTRALIAN PROCTOTRYPOIDEA
Structure very similar to ashmeadi Dodd, but the
punctures on the scutum and scutellum, are smaller and
more dense. First abdominal segment striate, the rest
smooth. Forewings somewhat infuscated, the margins
distinctly not equally inclined. Antenne as in ashmeadi.
Hab: New South Wales (Upper Tweed River). De-
scribed from one male caught by sweeping in open forest,
1000 feet. 17th May, 1914 (A. P. Dodd).
Type: South Australian Museum, a ¢ on a tag, the
antenne and forewings on a slide.
Dedicated to Arnold Feerste>.
MALLATELEIA WESTWOODI, sp., nov.
¢ Length, 1.95 mm.
Black ; femora, tibiz and antennal scape, fuscous ;
tarsi yellow. Head transverse, with fine scaly sculpture
and moderately dense, not large, thimble punctures, also
short fine white pubescence; eyes large, bare. Thorax
slightly longer than wide; scutum and scutellum with
similar sculpture to the head ; parapsidal furrows distinct
and complete. Abdomen a little longer than the head
and thorax united, a little wider than the thorax ; the
segments all more or less wider than long; Ist striate ;
the 2nd with striz far laterad smooth and glabrous mesad ;
3rd as long as following united, practically smooth mesad,
then with very fine scaly sculpture; the remaining seg-
ments wholly finely sculptured. Forewings long; rather
broad ; almost hyaline ; cephalic and caudal margins about
equally inclined ; discal cilia fine, exceedingly dens». Pedi-
cel short, a little longer than wide ; Ist funicle joint a little
Jonger, the 2nd quadrate, the 3rd longer than 2nd, but
shorter than Ist ; 3-9 subequal.
Hab: North Queensland (Pentland, 200 miles west
of Townsville). Described from one male caught by
sweeping in forest, September, 1914 (A. A. Girault).
«
Type: In the Queensland Museum, Brisbane, a ¢@
on a tag, antenne and forewings on a slide.
Dedicated to John Obadiah Westwood.
BY ALAN P. DODD. 93
AUSTROSCELIO. New genus.
g 2 Of stout form, very much resembling Hadronoius
Foerster, but more especiallly Hadronotoides Dodd.
Head very transverse ; eyes large, hairy: ocelli very
wide apart, the lateral ones touching the eye margins ;
viewed from in front the head is somewhat wider than
long; antennal depression very profound, occupying
almost all lower two-thirds of face. Thorax scarcely longer
than wide; convex; scutum large, without furrows ;
scutellum very large, projecting over and hiding the metano-
tum, bidentately emarginate at apex ; postscutellum with
a blunt tooth. Abdomen broadly sessile; a little longer
than the head and thorax united; one-half longer than
wide ; pointed at apex; slightly convex above, straight
beneath ; first segment very transverse, the second much
the longest, occupying nearly one-half of surface. Fore-
wings reaching apex of abdomen: broad ; submarginal
vein rather distant from the costa which it joins about
middle of wing; marginal vein very short, the stigmal
moderately long and oblique; postmarginal not devel-
oped. Antennz 12-jointed in both sexes, in the female
with a 6-jointed club, in the male filiform, the joints all
longer than wide.
Type: AUSTROSCELIO NIGRICOXA (Dodd).
s. Sparasion australicum Dodd, Entomological News,
Philadelphia, U.S.A., Vol. XXV, June, 1914,
p. 255-6.
Sparasion nigricoxa, Dodd. ‘Trans. Royal Soc. of
S.A., Vol. XXXVIII, May, 1914, p. 123.
Originally described as a species of Sparasion: the
description was misleading, since there is no frontal ledge
on the face, and the general structure of the species ex-
cluded it. The specific characters given for nigricoxra
do not hold, hence one name must fall. The female
has not been recorded, but two have been found, one from
the type locality of Gordonvale, the other being caught
by sweeping in forest, Pentland, 200 miles west of Towns-
ville, N.Q., September, 1914. (A. A. Girault).
94 AUSTRALIAN PROCTOTRYPOIDEA
9 Antennal funicle suffused red, rest of antenne
black ; scape slender, as long as next six joints combined ;
pedicel nearly twice as long as wide ; first funicle joint a
little narrower than pedicel, twice as long as wide, 2nd
quadrate, 3rd and 4th transverse: club joints 1-5 trans-
verse, Ist small. 2nd the largest.
AUSTROSCELIO ROBUSTUS, sp. nov.
Q Length, 2.50 mm.
Coal black: legs (except coxz) reddish yellow ; scape
and pedicel almost black ; next four joints golden yellow.
Head coarsely rugulose ; ocelli wide apart, the lateral
pair almost touching the eye margins : eyes rather densely
pubescent. Thorax scarcely longer than wide; scutum
and scutellum rather coarsely rugulose ; parapsidal furrows
not evident. Abdomen no wider than thorax, one-half
longer than wide, 2nd segment occupying about one-half
of surface ; abdomen wholly longitudinally rugose. Fore-
wings reaching apex of abdomen; broad ; somewhat in-
fuscated : submarginal vein attaining costa about middle
of wing; stigmal rather short, rather oblique; venation
yellowish. Antenne 12-jointed : scape moderately long
and slender; pedicel almost twice as long as wide; Ist
funicle joint slightly shorter and narrower than pedicel ;
2-4 wider than long: club plainly 6-jointed, joints 1-5
distinctly wider than long, 2nd slightly the widest.
Hab: New South Wales. Described from two females
in the collection of the Macleay Museum.
Type: Macleay Museum, Sydney: Hymenoptera 2p,
a Q ona tag, the antenne on a slide. 3
Very similar to the type species, nigrocoxa Dodd.
Genus PLASTOGRYON, Kieffer.
PLASTOGRYON UNICOLOR, Dodd.
One female sweeping in forest, Childers, South Queens-
land, 25th June, 1914 (A. P. Dodd).
PLASTOGRYON ELEGANS, sp. nov.
Q Length, 1.10 mm. Of slender form.
Black, the basal two-thirds of abdomen orange yellow ;
and antennal scape golden yellow.
BY ALAN P. DODD. 95
Head quadrate. Thorax distinctly longer than wide :
finely polygonally sculptured. Abdomen as long as head
and thorax united, over twice as long as wide ; Ist segment
striate ; 2nd occupying one-half of surface, polygonally
reticulate. Pedicel over twice as long as wide : Ist funicle
joint much shorter and narrower than pedicel, nearly twice
as long as wide. Forewings reaching well beyond apex of
abdomen ; moderately broad, hyaline; discal cilia moder-
ately coarse and dense ; marginal vein no longer than the
stigmal, the latter curved caudad somewhat at apex :
postmarginal twice as long as the marginal.
Hab: South Queensland (Childers). Described from
one female caught bv sweeping in forest, June 25th, 1914
(A> PE. Dodd).
Type: South Australian Museum, a 9 on a slide.
>
Genus HOPLOTELEIA, Ashmead.
HOPLOTELEIA NIGRICORNIS Dodd.
A male and female caught on foliage of plants, ete.,
round canefields, Halifax, Herbert River. North Queens-
land, 29th March, 1914 (A. P. Dodd). The male antennze
agree with those of australica, Dodd.
HopLoTELEIA SCULPTURATA, sp, nov.
Q Length, 4.10 mm.
Coal black; legs (including cox), and first three
funicle joints of antenne, bright reddish yellow.
Head and thorax coarsely rugulose, the rugosity of
the scutum shallower, the scutum also densely, finely
granulate. Lateral ocelli separated from each other by
twice their own diameter. Thorax no wider than the
head, distinctly longer than wide. Abdomen as long as
head and thorax united, its apex truncate. with two very
short spines; first two segments striate. the rest longi-
tudinally rugulose, the 3rd distinctly the longest. Body
pubescent, the hairs rather coarse. Forewings and antenne
as described for australica Dodd.
Hab: New South Wales (Chindera, Tweed River).
Described from one female caught by sweeping in forest,
12th May, 1914 (A. P. Dodd).
96 AUSTRALIAN PROCTOTRYPOIDEA
Type: South Australian Museum, a Q on a tag, the
antenne and forewings on a slide.
HOPLOTELEIA AUSTRALICA OCCIDENTALIS, new vartvety.
6 Length, 2.65 mm.
Similar to australica Dodd but the seape is bright
yellow, the pedicel and basal funicle joints suffused with
yellow.
Hab: West Queensland (Cloncurry). Described from
one male caught by sweeping in open forest, 18th April,
1914 (A. P. Dodd).
Type: South Australian Museum, a ¢ on a tag.
HOPLOTELEIA PERSIMILIS, Sp., nov.
6 Length, 2.65 mm.
Very similar to qaustralica but the antennal scape is
red at base: the funicle joints are longer, all distinctly
longer than wide ; the marginal vein is over one-third as
long as the stigmal, the latter slightly curved caudad at
apex ; and the hind tarsi are very long. as in nagricornis.
Hab: North Queensland (Halifax, Herbert River).
Described from one male captured with the above mentioned
specimens of nigricornis.
Type: South Australian Museum, a ¢ on a tag, the
antenne and forewings on a slide.
HOPLOTELEIA AUREISCAPUS, sp. nov.
Q Length, 2.90 mm.
Very similar to australica but the coxe yellow, also
the antennal scape, the pedicel and funicle slightly suffused
yellowish ; the abdomen pointed at apex ; scutum and scut-
telluam with only very scattered pubescence (in australica
rather dense on scutellum and caudal portion of scutum) ;
marginal vein almost one-half as Jong as the stigmal, which
ss rather more oblique ; bind tarsi long and «lender.
Hab: North Queensland (Gordonvale, near Cairns).
Described from one female caught by sweeping on edge
of jungle, January, 1914 (A. P. Dodd).
BY ALAN P. DODD. 97
Type: In the South Australian Museum, a 9 on a
tag, the antennz and forewings on a slide.
HoPLOTELEIA AUSTRALICA, Dodd.
Four females, one male, sweeping in forest, Pentland,
200 miles west of Townsville, September, 1914 (A. A.
Girault).
HOPLOTELEIA GRACILICORNIS, sp. nov.
Q Length, 3.30 mm.
Very similar to sculpturata Dodd but smaller; the
abdomen acute at apex; the thorax with only scattered
pubescense, all pubescense much finer; antennze wholly
black, more slender than in sculpturata, the 1st funicle
joint over twice as long as wide (not twice as long as wide in
sculpturata). Otherwise the same, or nearly.
Hab: New South Wales (Glen Innes, 4,500 feet).
Described from one female received from Mr. W. W. Froggatt
and labelled ** Glen Innes, A. M. Lea.”
Type: In the collections of Mr. W. W. Froggatt,
Government Entomologist of New South Wales. a female
ona tag, the antenne and forewings on a slide.
Genus TRICHOTELEIA, Kieffer.
TRICHOTELEIA ARGENTIPES, sp. nov.
Q Length, 4.25 mm.
Black ; abdomen brownish in centre ; legs (including
cox) and antennal scape, silvery yellow.
Head transverse-quadrate ; eyes large, bare: ocelli
large, the lateral ones further from each other than from
the median ocellus, and almost touching the eve margins.
Vertex caudad of lateral ocelli irregularly subtransversely
striate ; in front of lateral ocelli, longitudinally foveate ;
lower half of frons, transversely striate : antennz separated
by a distinct carina ; the head (except lower half of face)
with scattered small punctures ; occiput concave. Thorax
nearly one-half longer than wide. Pronotum not visible ;
scutum finely granulate, and with numerous setigerous
thimble-punctures ; parapsidal furrows deep and distinct,
98 AUSTRALIAN PROCTOTRYPOIDEA
wide apart, almost parallel ; scutellum smooth except for
a few minute punctures; metathoracic caudal angles
acute, the metanotum laterally with a patch of white
pubescence. Abdomen twice as long as head and thorax
united ; Ist segment almost twice as long as wide, longi-
tudinally striate, with a blunt horn projecting over and ~
against centre of metanotum, the horn transversely striate
at apex: 2nd segment somewhat longer than Ist, longi-
tudinally striate, except near the carinated margins, where
dense setigerous thimble-punctures prevail; 3rd shorter
than 2nd, granulate in centre, laterad of this striate, and
the lateral area of punctures wider; 4th one-half length
of 3rd, granulate in centre, then with the dense thimble
punctures: 5th as long as 4th, wholly granulate, except
for scattered punctures ; 6th forming a straight projection,
a little longer than two preceding segments united, granu-
late, and with numerous setigerous punctures. Forewings
reaching to apex of 6th abdominal segment; broad :
somewhat infuscated: discal cilia moderately fine, very
dense ; submarginal vein attaining costa about middle of
wing ; marginal one-half as long as the stigmal, which is long,
very oblique, its apex slightly curved caudad ; postmar-
ginal very long, several times as long as the stigmal ; basal
vein very distinct, very oblique, over one-half longer than
the stigmal ; median not indicated. Pedicel nearly twice
as long as wide: Ist funicle joint twice as long as pedicel ;
2nd slightly longer than Ist; 3rd a little shorter; 4th
distinctly shorter than 3rd; 5th shorter than 4th; but
distinctly longer than wide; club slender, 5-joited; Ist
the longest and widest, longer than wide, 2-4 quadrate.
Hab: North Queensland (Halifax, Herbert River).
Described from numerous females captured on a decayed
log in jungle, 6th April, 1914 (A. P. Dodd).
Type: Scuth Australian Museum, a Q on a tag,
antenne and forewings on a slide.
TRICHOTELEIA ACUTIVENTRIS, sp. nov.
2 Length, 3.20 mm.
Very similar to nigricincta Dodd, but the orange
coloration of the body is much deeper, the abdomen not
being noticeably margined with black, only darker along the
BY ALAN P. DODD 99
margins; medium lobe of scutum almost wholly black ;
antennal pedicel and funicle slightly suffused yellowish ;
head more transverse, the ocelli further apart, the lateral
ones further distant from each other than from the median
one ; head, scutum and scutellum almost smooth, with only
a very few scattered pin-punctures (punctu.es larger and
much more dense in nigricincta): thorax stouter, the
parapsidal furrows distant at posterior margin of scutum by
half their own length (distinctly less than half their own
length in nigricincta) ; Ist abdominal segment shorter than
either 2nd or 3rd, the 7th pointed and longer than two pre-
ceding, in both species; segments 5-7 with thimble-
punctures ; forewings with a more or less obscure median
longitudinal band, the rest slightly infuscated ; marginal
vein fully one-half as long as the stigmal, the postmarginal
twice as long as stigmal; funicle joints somewhat stouter,
the Ist a little longer than pedicel: abdomen over twice as
long as head and thorax united.
Hab: North Queensland (Harvey's Creek, near Cairns).
Described from one female caught by sweeping in jungle,
2nd August, 1914 (A. P. Dodd).
Type: South Australian Museum, a @2 on a tag,
antenne and forewings on a slide.
Genus MACROTELEIA, Westwood.
MACROTELEIA APICALIS, sp. nov.
Q Length, 4.25 mm. Long and slender.
Golden or orange veilow, the eyes and ocelli black ;
vertex of head, horn on basal abdominal segment, and
apical fourth of abdomen, sooty black; antennal club
black.
Head no wider than thorax, with scattered circular
punctures ; eyes large, bare ; lateral ocelli touching the
eye margins. Thorax nearly twice as long as wide ; scutum
and scutellum sculptured like the head, the punctures
setigerous : pronotum distinctly visible on the sides ;
parapsidal furrows deep and distinct. Abdomen over
twice as long as head and thorax united ; sessile, the apical
segments compressed laterally : wholly striate; the seg-
ments all longer than wide, the 3rd slightly longer than
100 AUSTRALIAN PROCTOTRYPOIDEA.
2nd or 4th. the Ist segment with a blunt horn at base.
Forewings barely reaching apex of 4th abdominal segment ;
slightly infuscated ; discal cilia moderately fine and dense ;
submarginal vein attaining costa about middle of wing ;
marginal vein over one-half longer than the stigmal, the
latter short, scarcely oblique ; postmarginal nearly twice
as long as marginal ; venation thick and distinct. Pedicel
long, over twice as long as greatest width, the Ist funicle
joint slightly longer and narrower, nearly four times as
long as wide ; 2nd not twice as long as wide, the 4th wider
than long; club rather slender, 6-jointed, Ist joint largest,
almost as long as wide.
Hab: North Queensland (Halifax, Herbert River).
Described from one female caught on foliage of plants
round canefield, 29th March, 1914 (A. P. Dodd).
Type: South Australian Museum, a Q on a tag,
antennz and forewings on a slide.
MACROTELEIA DISTINCTA sp. nov.
Q Length, 3.75 mm.
Black ; legs (including the coxz) and first six antennal
joints golden yellow.
Head subquadrate; densely punctate; eyes large,
bare ; ocelli large, the lateral ones almost touching the eye
margins. Thorax one-half longer than wide ; scutum and
scutellum densely confluently punctate, the punctures
moderately small; parapsidal furrows distinct; post-
scutellum with avather large bidentate spine mesad. Abdomen
one half longer than the head and thorax united ; sessile,
shghtly fusiform; 2nd and 3rd segments largest ; wholly
longitudinally striate and pubescent. Thorax also densely
pubescent. . Forewings reaching almost to apex of abdomen ;
broad ; almost hyaline; marginal vein slightly longer
than the stigmal, which is moderately short and oblique,
straight ; postmarginal twice as long as the marginal ;
venation clear golden yellow. Pedicel fully twice as long
as wide ; first funicle joint two-thirds longer than pedicel ;
2nd slightly longer than pedicel ; 3rd shorter ; 4th quadrate;
club 6-jointed.
BY ALAN P. DODD. LOL
G Scape yellow, rest of antenne black ; pedicel
slightly longer than wide; Ist funicle joint longer, almost
twice as long as wide; 2nd and 3rd shorter ; 4-9 quadrate.
Hab: New South Wales. Described from one pair
in the Macleay Museum and labelled ‘“‘ New South Wales.”
Types : Inthe Macleay Museum, Sydney, Hymenoptera
6p, the above specimens on two tags, antenne and fore-
wings on a slide.
Genus PLATYTELEIA, Dodd.
PLATYTELEIA LATIPENNIS. Dodd.
One female captured from foliage of plants around
canefields, Halifax, Herbert River, N.Q., 29th March,
1914 (A. P. Dodd).
Genus HaDRONOTOIDES, Dodd.
HADRONOTOIDES PENTATOMUS, Dodd.
In the collections of the Government Entomologist of
Queensland, Mr. Henry Tryon, there are several speci-
mens of this species, bred from pentatomid eggs, Kelvin
Grove, Brisbane. Formerly the species had been known
from several North Queensland localities.
HADRONOTOIDES MERIDIANUS, sp. nov.
Q Length, 2.25 mm.
Coal black : legs (except cephalic cox) clear golden
yellow ; antennal scape yellow at base, dusky 3t apex.
Head transverse, slightly wider than thorax ; rugose
punctate ; eyes large; ocelli wide apart, the lateral ones
distant from the eye margins by nearly their own diameter.
Thorax scarcely longer than wide; coarsely rugulose ;
scutellum large, rather deeply bidentate. Abdomen as
wide as thorax, no longer than wide ; lst segment striate,
rest longitudinally rugose ; first three segments subequal.
Forewings extending well beyond apex of abdomen;
broad ; hyaline ; discal cilia rather coarse and dense;
submarginal vein attaining costa about middle of wing ;
marginal vein fully one-half as long as stigmal, which is
102 AUSTRALIAN PROCTOTRYPOIDEA
moderately long, rather oblique ; postmarginal fully twice
as long as stigmal. Antenne 12-jointed ; pedicel long and
slender, almost twice as long as wide ; 1st funicle joint slightly
longer than pedicel ; 2nd as wide as long: 3rd wider than
long: club probably 6-jomted (the 3rd and 4th funicle
joints appear to form part of club, as in pentatomus). joints
1-5 distinctly wider than long, 2nd the largest.
3 Pedicel short and stout ; Ist funicle joint twice as
long as pedicel, fully twice as long as wide ; 2nd shorter ;
but distinctly longer than wide ; 4-9 subquadrate, gradually
narrowing towards apex.
Hab: South Australia. Described from two males,
one female in the Macleay Museum, and labelled “‘ South
Australia.”
Types : In the Macleay Museum, Sydney, Hymenoptera
3D, the above specimens on a tag, g and Q antenne and
forewings on a slide.
HADRONOTOIDES RETICULATUS, sp. nov.
@ Length, 1.55 mm.
Coal black: the legs (except the cox), reddish
yellow.
In general appearance and structure very similar to
pentatomus.
Head, scutum and scutellum rather coarsely rugulose
and with fine pubescence ; eyes hairy ; scutellum not so
large as in the two other species, almost semicircular, not so
deeply bidentate at apex. Abdomen somewhat longer
than wide ; first segment striate ; the second with a row of
deep fovee at base; cest of abdomen with fine, rather
dense, irregularly longitudinal reticulation. Pedicel one-
half longer than wide, the first funicle joint as long and
slightly narrower, the second a little wider than long; 4th
distinctly widened to form part of club. Marginal vein
one-half as long as the long stagmal. Otherwise about as
in pentatomus.
Hab: North Queensland (Pentland, 200 miles west of
Townsville). Described from two females caught by
sweeping in forest, September, 1914 (A. A. Girault).
Types: In the Queensland Museum, Brisbane, two
Qs on a tag, antenne and forewings on a slide.
BY ALAN P. DODD. 103.
Genus Hapronotus. Fersier.
Hapronotus nigricoxa, Dodd.
Two females captured from foliage of plants around
canefields, Halifax, Herbert River, N.Q., 29th March,
1914 (A. P. Dodd.)
Hapronotus Aquaticus, Dodd.
One male caught by sweeping in forest, Gordonvale,
N.Q., 13th August, 1914 (A. A. Girault).
Genus SCELIOMORPHA. Ashmead.
SCELIOMORPHA MAGNICLAVA, Sp. nov.
Q Length, 3.75 mm.
Coal black ; legs golden yellow, including the coxe ;
first five antennal joints slightly suffused with yellow.
Head no wider than thorax ; rugose-punctate, the
punctures of moderate size ; ocelli in an equilateral triangle,
the lateral pair distant from the eye margins by nearly
their own diameter. Thorax scarcely longer than wide ;
scutum with rather large, circular punctures, rather dense,
’ the spaces between the punctures finely scaly: scutellum
with large scattered punctures. the surface otherwise
-glabrous : parapsidal furrows complete; scutellum large.
Abdomen sessile, scarcely as wide as the thorax; as long
as the head and thorax combined: 2nd segment. slightly
the largest ; Ist segment with six strong striz centrally,
rest of abdomen densely longitudinally rugose. Forewings
reaching apex of abdomen; broad: infuscated:; discal
cilia rather fine, very dense ; submarginal vein attaining
costa about middle of wing ; stigmal vein moderately long,
not very oblique, straight ; venation golden yellow. Anten-
ne 12-jointed ; scape equal to next five joints combined ;
pedicel nearly twice as long as wide : funicle joints slightly
narrower than pedicel: Ist one-half longer than wide ;
2nd and 3rd wider than long: 4th widened, and probably
forming part of club; club 6-jointed, lst joint the longest
and widest, as long as wide, 2-5 twice as wide as long.
Hab: New South Wales. Described from one female
in the collections of the Macleay Museum.
Type: Macleay Museum, Sydney; Hymenoptera Ip.
a Q on a tag, the antenne and forewings on a slide.
104 AUSTRALIAN PROCTOTRYPOIDEA
ScELIOMORPHA NIGRICLAVA, sp. nov.
Q@ Length, 4.75 mm.
Like magniclava but considerably larger ; thorax one-
half longer than wide ; abdomen longer, somewhat longer
than head and thorax combined: lateral ocelli almost
touching the eye margins ; scutum with larger punctures,
the spaces between glabrous : scutellum sculptured like the
scutum, but with an area centrally smooth except for a
few pin-punctures : first six antennal joints golden yellow,
the Ist funicle joint as long and as wide as the pedicel ;
club not so wide, the Ist club joint a little wider than long ;
forewings rather less infuscated.
Hab: New South Wales. Described from one female
with magniclava.
Type: Macleay Museum, Sydney : Hymenoptera 8p-
a 2 ona tag, the antenne and forewings on a slide.
ScELIOMORPHA CONCOLORIPES. sp. nov.
Q Length, 3.25 mm.
Very similar to magniclava, but the coxe, femora,
and tibie are black (except at the knees); the scutellum
has the fine, scaly sculpture, as well as the punctures, |
the venation is rather darker ; pedicel only one-half longer
than wide ; Ist funicle joint as long and as wide as pedicel ;
club narrower, asin nigriclava.
Hab: New South Wales. Described from one female
with the two preceding species.
Type: Macleay Museum, Sydney; Hymenoptera 9p ;
a Q on a tag, the antennz and forewings on a slide.
SCELIOMORPHA ATRICOXA. sp. nov.
g Length, 4.40 mm. With the habitus of the genus
Scelio.
Very similar to nigriclava but thorax not one-half
longer than wide: abdomen distinctly longer than head
and thorax united ; scutum and scutellum wholly densely
punctate, and with fine, scaly sculpture ; abdomen rugose
punctate (except Ist segment): coxe black; apex of
stigmal vein curved distinctly caudad. Scape and pedicel
BV ALAN P. DODD. 105
yellow, rest of antenne black ; pedicel twice as long as
wide ; subequal to 2nd funicle joint. the Ist distinctly
longer. ;
Hab: New South Wales -(Elizabeth Bay, Sydney).
Described from one male with the preceding species.
Type: Macleay Museum, Sydney : Hymenoptera 11D, _
a g ona tag, the antenne and forewings on a shde.
Genus DicROTELEIA, Kieffer.
DICROTELEIA SOLITARIA, sp. nov.
Q Length, 4.40 mm.
Shining black; legs (including coxz) and antennal
scape, golden yellow.
Head subquadrate, with large circular punctures, the
surface with a dull opaqueness ; eyes large, bare ; ocelli
large, in an equilateral triangle, the lateral ones touching
the eye margins; on the occiput, the punctures form
transverse rugose punctation. Thorax nearly twice as
long as wide, the pronotum not visible from above ; scutum
sculptured like the head, the punctures in irregular trans-
verse rows separated by ridges ; punctures less dense on
scutellum. Parapsidal furrows deep, distinct, the median
carina of scutum conspicuous and corresponding to a median
carina on the scutellum ; postscutellum almost square.
Abdomen one-half longer than the head and thorax united ;
no wider than thorax; sessile, the apex pointed: Ist
segment with a blunt prominence: first four segments
longitudinally rugose ; the apical two with scattered punc-
tures ; 2nd and 3rd the longest, subequal, distinctly longer
than wide. Body with inconspicuous pubescence. Fore-
wings reaching to middle of 5th abdominal segment ; broad ;
infuscated ; discal cilia rather coarse and dense; venation
fuscous, as in the Australian species of Sceliomorpha
Ashmead, the stigmal vein long and oblique; marginal
punctiform ; submarginal rather remote from costa; no
other veins. Pedicel one-half longer than wide; Ist
funicle joint distinctly longer; 2nd as long as _ pedicel,
3rd _ shorter ; 4th as wide as long; club 6-jointed, Ist
joint largest, as long as wide ; 2-5 wider than long.
H
106 AUSTRALIAN PROCTOTRYPOIDEA
Hab: North Queensland (Gordonvale, near Cairns).
Described from one female caught by sweeping in jungle,
20th June, 1914 (A. A. Girault).
Type: South Australian Museum, a Q on a tag,
antenne and forewings on a slide.
This species appears to agree with Kieffer’s diagnosis
of the genus (subgenus of Kieffer). In general appearance
and structure it resembles the Australian species of Hoplo-
teleia Ashmead. The type and only other species of the
genus, Oxyscelio (Dicroteleia) rugosa Kieffer comes from
Java.
DICROTELEIA GLABRISCUTELLUM, sp. nov.
Q Length. 2.95 mm.
Coal black : legs (including coxe) bright golden yellow,
also the pedicel and first three funicle joints, the scape
distinctly darker.
Head transverse ; the face with large, not very close,
shallow punctures, some of these on the vertex joining
and forming irregular transverse rugosity ; no wider than
the thorax ; eyes very large, bare; ocelli large, separated
from the eye margins by half their own diameter. Thorax
somewhat longer than wide: scutum large, with large,
rather close, shallow punctures, these setigerous ; parap-
sidal furrows distinct. also a distinct median carina present ;
scutellum large, smooth, shining, except for a few scattered
indefinite pin-punctures, these more distinct laterad ; post-
scutellum small, quadrate ; metanotum very short at meson.
Abdomen broadly sessile : as long as the head and thorax
combined, slightly narrower than the thorax ; the segments
all more or less wider than long, the 2nd the largest, a little _
longer than the 3rd ; Ist striate, the 2nd and 3rd with large,
shallow, rather close punctures divided into rows by longitu-
dinal strize, the 4th and 5th without the strie and with
the punctures setigerous. Forewings reaching apex of
abdomen, broad; infuscate: submarginal vein attaining
costa about middle of wing: stigmal vein very long and
oblique, its apex curved slightly caudad ; venation golden
yellow. Antennz 12-jointed; scape long and slender ;
pedicel over twice as long as wide, the first funicle joint
BY ALAN P. DODD. 107
slightly shorter ; 2-4 wider than long, the 4th somewhat
widened ; club rather compact, first joint as long as wide,
2-5 much wider than long. .
Hab: North Queensland (Harvey's Creek, near Cairns).
Described from two females caught on foliage of plants
in jungle country, 12th October, 1914 (A. P. Dodd).
Type: In the South Australian Museum, a 92 ona
tag, the antenne and forewings on a slide.
The species Sceliomorpha rugulosa, Dodd, S. hyalini-
pennis, Dodd, S. montana, Dodd, and S. nigricoxa, Dodd,
must be included here, since they possess the median carina
on the scutum, and the quadrate postscutellum. These
four and glabriscutellum are closely related, but solitaria
is very distinct. The species of Sceliomorpha described
in this paper, will probably fall here, but at present the
types are not accessible to me.
renus BARYCONUS, Fersiler.
BARYCONUS DELICATULUS, sp. nov.
Q Length, 1.75 mm. Slender.
Black ; the trochanters, knees, tibiz and __ tarsi
testaceous.
Head subquadrate, quite smooth. Thorax distinctly
longer than wide; narrowed anteriorly ; scutum as long
as wide, the parapsidal furrows well defined ; scutum and
scutellum with polygonal scaly sculpture, not very fine.
Abdomen twice as long as head and thorax united ; dis-
tinctly petiolate ; the apical two segments produced into
a narrow point: Ist segment with a distinct horn, longer
than wide; 2nd and 8rd segments longest ; Ist and 2nd
striate, the rest longitudinally reticulate. Forewings
reaching almost to apex of abdomen ; moderately narrow ;
hyaline, with an obscure band covering apical portion of
submarginal, and all marginal veins, and a second obscure
band covering almost apical third of wing; discal cilia
fine, rather dense; submarginal vein attaining cos*a about
middle of wing; marginal vein two-thirds as long as the
stigmal, the latter moderately long, oblique, quite straight ;
postmarginal over thrice as long as the stigmal ; basal vein
not indicated. Antennz 12-jointed; pedicel twice as long
108 AUSTRALIAN PROCTOTRYPOIDEA
as wide ; Ist and 2nd funicle joints each subequal to pedicel ;
3rd a little longer than wide; 4th quadrate: club rather
compact, 6-jointed, joints 1-5 about equal in length, 3rd
slightly the widest.
Hab: South Queensland (Burnett Heads, Bundaberg).
Described from one female caught by sweeping in forest,
20th June, 1914 (A. P. Dodd).
Type: South Australian Museum, a Q on a tag.
antenne and forewings on a slide.
Baryconus puucis, Dodd.
Numerous specimens caught on foliage of plants round
canefields, Halifax, Herbert Liver, North Queensland,
March, 1914 (A. P. Dodd).
BARYCONUS VARIIPES, sp. nov.
Q Length, 1.55 mm. Of very slender form.
Bright golden or orange yellow; eyes, ocelli, femora,
tibize (except the knees), horn on abdomen, a rather broad
band at caudal half of second segment, and- apical two-
fifths of abdomen (from caudal thirds of third segment),
black ; scutellum somewhat dusky.
Head subquadrate; eyes moderate ; ocelli in a very
obtuse-angled triangle. Thorax slender, twice as long as
greatest width; parapsidal furrows present for caudal
two-thirds of scutum, approaching rather close together
caudad ; scutellum with a line of fine foveze across its
base. Abdomen slender ; somewhat longer than the head
and thorax united ; no wider than the thorax ; Ist s>gment
about twice as long as wide, with a blunt horn; 2nd and
3rd also somewhat longer than wide, the 3rd a little the
larger, the following segments combined about equal to
length of 3rd. Head, scutum and scutellum with very fine
polygonal scaly sculpture ; the abdomen wholly longitudinally
striate. Legslongandslender. Antenne 12 jointed ; scape
barely longer than next two joints united ; pedicel slender,
fully two and a half times as long as wide; first funicle
joint a little shorter and narrower than the pedicel, nearly
thrice as long as wide; the others shortening, the 4th
quadrate : club 6-jointed, 3-5 slightly the largest, all
BY ALAN P.. DODD. 109
transverse. Forewings very narrow, with two bark bands
about as in fasciatus, the wing apex more lightly infuscate,
and thus more or less hyaline ; discal cilia very fine and
dense ; marginal cilia short.
Hab: North Queensland (Pentland, 200 miles west
of Townsville). Described from one female caught by
sweeping in forest, September, 1914 (A. A. Girault).
Type: In the Queensland Museum, Brisbane, a Q ona
tag, the antennz and forewings on a slide.
This species comes nearest to fasciatus Dodd. and
maculatus Dodd, but is at once distinguished by having
much more black on the abdomen and legs. Of similar
slender build to fasciatus, which is more slender than macu-
latus.
BARYCONUS CITREUS, sp. nov.
Q Length, 1.60 mm. Stout and robust.
In my table of species (1914) running near gloriosus
Dodd.
Golden yellow ; eyes, ocelli, segments 2 and 4-8 of
abdomen, and the antennze (except the scape), black ;
scutellum and centre of seutum, brownish.
Head and thorax with fine polygonal scaly sculpture,
pubescent. Lateral ocelli touching the eve margins.
Thorax no longer than wide, the scutum large, the parap-
sidal furrows well defined, wide apart; postscutellum
unarmed. Abdomen no longer than head and _ thorax
combined, no wider than thorax, lst and base of 2nd seg-
ments striate, the rest smooth; 3rd segment somewhat
the longest ; all segments wider than long : Ist segment
without a horn. Forewings reaching apex of abdomen ;
rather broad ; infuscated ; discal cilia fine, very dense ;
submarginal vein attaining the costa about middle of wing ;
marginal vein almost one-half as long as the stigmal, the
latter long, straight, scarcely oblique; postmarginal
twice as long as the stigmal; basal vein rather distinct,
oblique. Pedicel one-half longer than wide ; Ist funicle
joint slightly longer than pedicel ; 2-4 shortening, the 4th
transverse : club 6-jointed, compact, large, joints 1-5
transverse and of equal length, the 3rd slightly the widest.
110 AUSTRALIAN PROCTOTRYPOIDEA.
Hab: South Queensland (Childers). Described from
one female caught by sweeping in the open forest, 2nd
July, 1914 (A. P. Dodd).
Type: In the South Australian Museum, a 9 on a
tag, the head and forewings on a slide.
Genus CREMASTOSCELIO, Dodd.
CREMASTOSCELIO FLAVIVENTRIS, Sp. nov.
Q Length, 1.35 mm.
Head and thorax black; abdomen golden yellow,
like the legs, its apex black ; first four antennal joints vellow,
next four slightly suffused with yellow, the club black.
Very similar in structure to the three other species in
the genus, but the abdomen is more slender, distinctly
longer than the head and thorax united. Mandibles 4
dentate ; discal cilia not very fine, dense, in about 30 rows.
Hab: New South Wales (Upper Tweed River). De-
scribed from one female caught by sweeping foliage and
grass in forest, 1,000 feet, 17th May, 1914 (A. P. Dodd).
Type: In the South Australian Museum, a 92 ona
slide. Later another female was found labelled “‘ Sweepng
forest on hills, Maclean, Clarence River, N.S.W., 30th
May, 1914 (A. P. Dodd.) ”
Genus Scevio Latreille.
Table of Australian Species.
Males ; females.
(1) Body wholly black Ay : Oe! .. = (A)
Body more or less bright soclelicie or selligrialiad ie sey p= MK)
(2) Abdomen black .. is Hee my: Rey Se 83)
Thorax and abdomen wholly er Pretnulo e inp
= cruentalus sp. nov. (West Queensland)
(3) Seutellum black ; abdomen wholly striate
= nigriscutellum Dodd (North @ueondlanay
Thorax uniformly red; Ist, 2nd, and 5th abdominal seg-
ments striate, 3rd and 4th polygonally reticulate ; female
= semisanguineus, Girault (Northern Territory)
(4) Vertex of head with scattered punctures —(o)
Vertex of head with large dense punctures = (9)
Vertex of head reticulately rugose = (i)
BY ALAN P. DODD. Mik
(5) Coxae and at least tirst three antennal joints vellow ; females = (6)
Coxae and all antenne black ., 53 Se se eae (ai))
(6) Scutum and scutellum coarsely reticulately rugose ; Ist and
2nd segments striate, 3rd reticulate, apex of 4th and all
remaining segments hardly sculptured
= pulchellus Crawford (New South Wales)
Scutum and scutellum with large circular punctures ; abdomen
finely longitudinally striate — fulyidus, Crawford (New S. Wales)
(7) Seutum and scutellum with large scattered punctures: legs
almost wholly black ; parapsidal furrows not indicated ; female
= varipunctatus, Dodd (North Queensland)
Scutum and scutellum confluently or rugose punctate; legs
(except coxze) not black; parapsidal furrows indicated or
~ distinct As Ste ae Ae Be a ae TS)
(8) Scutum and scutellum rugose punctate; segments after Ist
and 2nd finely longitudinally reticulate; male, female
= parvicornis sp. noy. (South Austr.)
Scutum and scutellum confluently punctate, the punctures
varying in size ;. abdomen wholly striate, except for smooth
median areas on segments 3-5; female Sis
— diemenensis sp. noy. (Tasmania)
(9) Coxe yellow; antennal scape and pedicel yellow ; female. .
= punctaticeps, Dodd (North Queensland)
Coxe black ; antennz wholly black .. Sts a pee LO)
(10) Lower half of face striate; parapsidal furrows deep and
distinct ; abdominal segments 3-6 finely striate, the cross-
strie distinct; female oe ae ne te
= striatifacies sp. nov. (New South Wales)
Striz on face only below insertion of antennie ; parapsidal
furrows very faintly indicated; abdomen strongly striate,
the cross-striz not visible; male 34. ae ar
= nigricova Dodd (North Queensland :
(11) Abdomen wholly longitudinally rugose or striate, except
sometimes for smooth median areas. . ars Ae een (lies)
Abdomen with most of the segments not longitudinally
rugose or striate sis he ae “hs 3 Ste I.)
(12) Coxz and femora black, also the antenn»; wings hyaline :
segments after first finely reticulately rugose; male
= nigricornis Dodd (North Queensland)
All legs yellow, also antennal scape and pedicel; wings not
hyaline: segments 3-5 with fine close shallow punctures ;
female es be es = chortoicetes Frogeatt (N. S. Wales)
(13) Abdomen longitudinally rugose; male; female .. ae
= froggatti Crawford (East Q’land)
Abdomen longitudinally striate ie ais ar o5 == (LED
(14) Coxe black be ae Pe rs se ae oo (15)
(18)
Coxe yellow de a as ar Be oc oc
112 AUSTRALIAN PROCTOTRYPOIDEA.
(15) Femora black; rugosity of thorax with a distinct tendency
to become Spas scutellum with a median carina ;
female Sie 5 .. = locuste sp. nov. (North Queensland)
Femora not bink rugosity of thorax reticulate ; scutellum
without a median carina as 4s os ye a (6)
(16) Head, pronotum and sides of thorax with long, white
pubescence ; rugosity of head not very coarse; female
= pilosiceps sp. nov. (New South Wales)
Pubescence not long or very distinct ; rugosity of head very
coarse; males se ae ae Ais oe ee)
(17) Wings hyaline; abdomen finely striate, the 2nd and 3rd
segments with median areas not striate, 4th distinctly longer
than 3rd 3% ae Si = flavicornis Dodd (N. Q’land)
Wings not hyaline: a smooth area present at caudal two-
thirds of 3rd segment mesad, 3rd distinctly longer than 4th. .
= perplexus sp. noy. (N. Q’land)
(18) Head, pronotum, and sides of thorax with long whitish
pubescence; female .. = pilosus Dodd (North Queensland)
Pubescence not distinct or long ote : ae SS (I),
(19) Third funicle joint of male antennze sanee enlarged, longer
than wide rs 5 ea : ot Fa — od (2) I
Third funicle joint of vale antenne nik much enlar sei wider
than long : Be as ae of He ag = AY
(20) Male; antenne Bins funicle joints 4-7 not or barely
wider than long; stigmal vein as in ov?, the stigmal spot on
the distal side of stigmal and marginal veins ..
= orientalis Dodd (North Qidbdelana)
Male; scape red, the antenne becoming black towards
apex; funicle joints 4-7 distinctly wider than long; stigmal
vein straight, as in australis, the stigmal spot on both sides
of marginal and stigmal veins = affinis sp. nov. (North Queensland)
(21) Female antenne wholly black; stigmal vein straight :
= australis Froggatt (East Q’land and N.S.W.)
Female antenne with at least first two joints yellow; stigmal
vein slightly convexly curved
= ovi Girault (East Q’ ion sal N. Ss. W. Wert Q’land). —
SCELIO CRUENTATUS, sp. nov.
Q Length, 4.15 mm.
Bright red; head, apex of abdomen and last seven
antennal joints, black.
Head and thorax cearsely rugose, the metanotum with
longitudinal carine or striae, the abdomen wholly longitu-
dinally striate. Head transverse, no wider than the thorax,
the occiput concave ; eyes bare. Thorax distinctly longer
than wide, the parapsidal furrows deep and distinet. Abdo-
men a little longer than head and thorax united, fusiform
BY ALAN P. DODD. 113
no wider than thorax, the 3rd segment shghtly the longest.
Forewings reaching almost to apex of abdomen ; broad ;
rather darkly infuscated ; venation not very distinct, the
stigmal vein moderately long, scarcely oblique, straight ;
stigmal spot rather distinct, irregularly circular. Antennee
short and stout, the joints beyond the third all much wider
than long: pedicel over twice as long as wide, slightly
Ionger than Ist funicle joint. Metanotum with white
pubescence laterally.
Hab: West Queensland (Cloncurry). Described from
one female caught on ground, 18th April, 1914 (A. P. Dodd),
Type: In the South Australian Museum, a Q ona tag,
antenne and forewings on a slide.
SCELIO PARVICORNIS, sp. nov.
Q@ Length, 3.75 mm.
Black; legs reddish yellow, the cox black, the
femora dusky, antenne wholly black.
Head with scattered moderately large punctures. Thorax
rugose-punctate ; parapsidal furrows distinct. Abdomen
fully as long as head and thorax united, fully twice as long
as its greatest width; Ist and 2nd segments striate, the
rest finely longitudinally reticulate, 3rd and 4th segments
a little the largest. Forewings reaching apex of abdomen ;
moderately broad; not much infuscated; discal cilia
dense, rather fine; venation pale yellow; stigmal vein
moderately long, not very oblique, straight ; stigmal spot
not well defined. Antenne short and_ stout ; pedicel
one-half longer than wide ; Ist funicle joint a little shorter
and narrower than pedicel ; remaining joints much wider
than long, the last six forming a stout club.
3 Forewings practically hyaline. Antenne black at
base, becoming suffused with brown towards apex, scape
slightly thickened ; pedicel short and stout; Ist funicle
joint a little longer than wide ; 2-7 distinctly wider than
long, 3rd the widest but not much enlarged.
Hab: South Australia. Described from one pair in
the collections of the Macleay Museum.
Types : Macleay Museum, Sydney ; Hymenoptera 4p.
the above specimens on a tag. ¢ and Q antenne and
forewings on a slide.
114 AUSTRALIAN PROCTOTRYPOUIDEA.
ScELIO NIGRICOXA, Dodd.
“(Archiv fiir Naturgeschichte.”’ Berlin, February,
1914, pe '78;) ‘
g Antenne wholly black: Ist funicle joint one-half
longer than wide ; 2nd as wide as long; 3rd only slightly
dilated, wider than long ; 4-7 much wider than long.
One male catight by sweeping in forest, Gordonvale,
28th July, 1914 (A. A. Girault).
ScELIO ovi Girault. (Proc. Ent. Soc. of Washington,
Vol. XV, No. 1, 1913. pp. 4-5).
Taken in company with australis, Froggatt, on roadways
at Chindera, Tweed River, and Harwood, Clarence River,
N.S.W., Mav, 1914, also from egg beds of Locusta danica.,
Halifax, Herbert River, N.Q., March, 1914; also one male
caught on ground, Cloncurry, West Queensland. 16th
April, 1914 (A. P. Dodd).
SCELIO DIEMENENSIS, sp. nov.
Q Length, 3.40 mm.
Black; legs (except the cox) golden yellow, the
femora slightly dusky ; antennz wholly black.
Head transverse, with scattered moderately small
punctures ; ocelli wide apart, the lateral ones touching
the eye margins. Thorax one-half lIcnger than wide ;
scutum and scutellum densely confluently punctate, the
punctures not of uniform size, some very large, others
very small; punctures not setigerous. Parapsidal furrows
indicated. Metanotum rugose. Abdomen as long as
head and thorax united, no wider than thorax; wholly
longitudinally striate, the strie after the 2nd segment
not regularly straight ; apex of 3rd segment mesad, and
a median area on segments 4-5, smooth, except for a very
few scattered pin-punctures (dorsal aspect) ; segments
after 5, irregularly rugulose; 3rd segment slightly the
longest. Fovewings as in parvicornis Dodd. Pedicel
nearly as long as wide ; Ist funicle joint as long and as wide
as pedicel : club not distinctly 6-jointed, at least 7-jointed.
Occiput somewhat transvesely rugose. Lower half of
BY ALAN P. DODD. 115
face striate, the antennal depression smooth. Abdomen
ventrad like dorsal but segments after 3 almost wholly
smooth, and with a few scattered punctur:s. Punctures
on head denser on upper portion of face.
Hab: Tasmania (Hobart). Described from two females
received from Mr. W. W. Froggatt and labelled “* Hobart ;
ASN Leas’
Type: In the South Australian Museum, a Q on a
tag. antenne and forewings on a slide.
Cotype: In the collections of Mr. W. W. Froggatt,
Government Entomologist, Sydney, a Q on a tag.
SCELIO AUSTRALIS, Froggatt (1910, Farmer’s Bulletin No. 29,
Department of Agriculture, N.S.W.)
Taken on roadsides at Harwood, Clarence River,
N.S.W., in company with ov Girault, pilosiceps Dodd,
and striatifacies Dodd, May, 1914 (A. P. Dodd): on road-
sides Chindera, Tweed River, N.S.W., May, 1914, in
company with ow (A. P. Dodd); on roadway, Childers,
South Queensland, Ist July, 1914 (A. P. Dodd) ; and many
hundreds around egg beds of Locusta danica, Halifax,
Herbert River, N.Q., March, 1914 (A. P. Dodd). On
warm, clear days it was noticed that during the middle of
the day, the Scelios remained inactive. In searching for
host eggs, the female, with the antenne held quivering
in front of her head, digs obliquely in the earth with the
forelegs, which are kept in constant motion the while.
SCELIO STRIATIFACIES, sp. nov.
Q Length, 4.05 mm.
Very similar to nigricoxa Dodd, but somewhat stouter,
the abdomen distinctly so ; parapsidal furrows very distinct
(not or only faintly indicated in nigricova); metanotum
finely rugose (very coarsely so in nigricova) ; abdominal
segments after the 2nd finely striate, the cross-strie
distinct. the longitudinal ones hence irregular (in nigricoxa
abdomen strongly striate, the cross-striz not showing,
the longitudinal ones hence without irregularities): face
round antennal depression circularly striate, the strize
116 AUSTRALIAN PROCTOTRYPOIDEA.
converging toward the mouth (in nigricoxa, face round
antennal depression rugose, the striz only present below
insertion of antenne); antennal depression smooth in
both species. Antenne wholly black; Ist funicle joint
distinctly larger than pedicel, one-half longer than greatest
width ; others very transverse.
Hab: New South Wales (Harwood, Clarence River).
Described from one female taken in company with ov,
australis and pilosiceps, 26th May, 1914 (A. P. Dodd).
Type: In the South Australian Museum, a 9 on a
tag, the antennz and forewings on a slide.
SCELIO PILOSICEPS, sp. nov.
Q Length, 4.00 mm.
Very similar to australis Froggatt but the coxze are
black ;: the head, pronotum and sides of thorax have the
dense long white pubescence of pilosus Dodd ; the head in
australis is uniformly rugose, in this species the rugosity is
less coarse and the caudal portion of the vertex and the
occiput are transversely rugose ; the parapsidal furrows
are not indicated ; the striz con the abdominal segments
are finer, disapp2aring in extreme meson of the 4th segment,
all the segments with short cross-strize joining the longitu-
dinal ones (these striz much less distinct in australis and
not present on segment 4-6); segments 4-5 in australis
have a median longitudinal carina more or less distinct,
this is absent in pilosiceps ; also the legs are of a deeper
color ; otherwise the same or nearly so.
Hab: New South Wales (Harwood, Clarence River).
Described from one female taken with the preceding species.
Type: In the South Australian Museum, a Q on a
tag, antenne and forewings on a slide.
SCELIO AFFINIS, sp. nov.
6 Length, 3.70 mm.
Very similar to australis but differs as follows :—
in australis the striz on the 3rd segment are irregular,
this being caused by the short cross-strie, im this species
the striz are uniform without any irregularities; the
BY ALAN P. DODD. IEF;
antennal depression in affinis is rugose immediately above
the insertion of the antenne, the upper part of the depression
smooth, in australis the upper portion of the depression is
finely rugose, below this smooth, also there is a distinct
median carina running from vertex of this depression to
the elevation on which the antennz are inserted ; the 3rd
funicle joint is not so much enlarged, wider than long,
no longer than 2nd (distinctly so in australts), and distinctly
shorter than Ist (as long as Ist in australis), also the antenn
are colored differently, the scape being red, next four joints
slightly suffused with red, apical five joints black. Com-
pared with f australis.
Hab: North Queensland (Gordonvale, near Cairns).
Described from one male caught by sweeping in forest,
26th May, 1914 (A. A. Girault).
Type: In the South Australian Museum, a ¢ or a
tag, antenne and forewings on a slide.
SCELIO LOCUST, sp. nov.
Q Length, 3.10 min.
Very similar to pilosiceps, Dodd, but the femora alsc
black, the pubescence not nearly so distinct, the head more
quadrate, the rugosity on the head still finer and not trans-
verse caudad, the rugosity on scutum and scutellum having
a distinct tendency to become longitudnial, scutellum with
a median longitudinal carina, the meson of 4th abdominal
segment not smooth, the pedicel and funicle joints distinctly
shorter.
Hab: North Queensland (Halifax, Herbert River).
Described from one female taken with ovi, australis, and
perplexus from egg bed of Locusta danica, March, 1914
(A. P. Dodd).
Type : South Australian Museum, a 9 on a tag, the
antenne and forewings on a slide.
SCELIO PERPLEXUS, sp. nov.
6 Length, 3.95 mm.
Very similar to australis but the coxe are black ;
the funicle joints are more yellowish, the joints after the
Ist wider than long, the 3rd not much enlarged ; sculpture
of abdomen as in orientalis Dodd.
11s AUSTRALIAN PROCTOTRYPOIDEA.
Hal,: North Queensland (Halifax, Herbert River).
Described from one male taken in egg hed of Locusta danica
in company with Jocuste, ovt and australis, March, 1914
(A. P. Dodd).
Type: In the South Australian Museum, a g ona
tag, the antenne and forewings on a slide.
.
SCELIO FROGGATTI, Crawford.
1 am not able to recencile the male specimen identified
by Girault (Ent. Soc. of Washington, D.C., Vol. XV, No. 1.
1915. pp. 6-7) and myself (Trans. Royal Soc. of South Aus-
tralia, Vol. XX XVII, 1913, p. 13") with Crawford’s species.
Crawford had only female specimens but in Mr. W. W.
Froggatt’s collection there are males labelled * Scelio frog-
gatt., and said to have been bred with the female type
material. These males have the antennz colored as in
australis. Moreover it does not seem likely that a female
with dark brown (i.e. black) antenne should have a male
with the antenneze wholly honey yellow. The antenne of
this male specimen differ from those of ovi and australis in
that the third funicle joint is not much enlarged.
SCELIO. FULGIDUS. Crawford.
Crawford's description gives the color of the abdomen
as dark brown, but in the Froggatt collection are specimens
of the type material with the abdomen jet black. It is
possible that Crawford’s specimens had the abdomen
discolored in some way, perhaps from remaining long in
alcohol. Fulgidus has a broader type of abdomen than
the species related to australis, as have also pulchellus
Crawford and chortoicetes Froggatt, of which I have seen
specimens.
SCELIO, sp. ?
In March, 1914, in company with other Scelios on egg-
beds of Locusta danica Halifax, Herbert River, N.Q.,
five specimens were observed with a reddish thorax, but
unfortunately were not captured.
BY ALAN P. DODD. 119
ScELIO PUNCTATICEPS, Dodd.
« Archiv fiir Naturgeschichte,” Berlin, 79, February,
L914, pps 17-8.
Abdominal segments after the first, finely striate :
head densely confluently punctate, except for transverse
area (very narrow) between the lateral ocelli, which is
practically smooth : stigmal vein not curved. Type re-
examined, also one female caught by sweeping in forest,
Pentland, 200 miles west of Townsville, September, 1914
(A. A. Girault).
Genus ENCYRTOSCELIO, new genus.
Q Vertex of head extraordinarily lengthened, being
as long cephalo-caudad as its greatest width, and as long as
the thorax, but no wider, its cephalic margin convex, and
with a rim or carina following the cephalic margin from eye
to eye; eyes moderately large, but not half as long as the
head, bare, situated far down on the sides of the face ;
ocelli absent ; viewed from the side, the head is conical,
the apex of the cone cephalad, and almost pointed. Anten-
ne inserted in a deep depression, near the mouth, and right
against the vertex of the thorax; 12-jointed, with five
funicle and five club joints. Mandibles extraordinarily
long and slender, straight, several times as long as wide,
and nearly as long as the long scape, with three small teeth.
Legs normal. Thorax stout, as long as wide, as in Had-
ronotus Foerster, the pronotum not visible, the scutum
large but wider than long: scutellum semicircular, pro-
jecting over and completely hiding the short metanotum.
Abdomen broadly sessile, short and stout, as in Hadronotus,
no wider or longer than the thorax; 2nd segment the
longest, occupying nearly one-half of the surface. Fore-
wings narrowed at base, the caudal margin straight (7.e.
when the wing is outstretched the caudal margin runs at
right angles to the body), and not at all curved, the cephalic
margin much inclined cephalad, so that the wing is nearly
hemispherical, the caudal margin forming the base, the
distal margin broadly rounded, but cut sharply off at the
caudal margin; the proximo-cephalad margin of the
hemisphere prolonged and narrowed towards the caudal
120 ‘USTRALIAN PROCTOTRYPOIDEA.
margin at base, the cephalic and distal margins of the
wing shaped like a section of a balloon ; marginal cilia absent
on both the cephalic and caudal! margins, the distal margin
serrated and with extremely dense, long, curved cilia,
quite as long as the greatest wing width, and appear-
ing like plumes; discal cilia apparently absent, or so fine
as not to be seen: wings just reaching apex of abdomen,
and not much longer than their greatest width: totally
without venation.
This genus is utterly unlike any other Scelionid genus
known. Its thoracic and abdominal characters suggest
its relationship with the genus Hadronotus, but its extra-
ordinarily shaped head, fhe absence of ccelli, and the
peculiar wings make it unique for the family. It is un-
doubtedly the most remarkable Scelionid genus at present
known to science.
Type: ENCYRTOSCELIO MIRISSIMUS described herewith.
ENCYRTOSCELIO MIRISSIMUS, Sp. NOV.
Q Length, 1.15 mm.
Coal black ; the legs (except the cox) and first seven
antennal joints golden yellow, the funicle joints a little
dusky.
Head and thorax with fine, polygonal, scaly sculpture, |
the head also with small scattered punctures, the punctures
not setigerous. Abdomen with close polygonal reticulation, .
the reticulation in raised lines. Antenne 12-jointed ;
scape long and slender ; pedicel one-half longer than wide, -
fully as long as first two funicle joints combined ; funicle .
joints transverse, the Ist narrower than the others ; club
5-jointed, joints 1-4 distinctly wider than long, 2nd slightly
the widest. Forewings somewhat infuscated, opaque.
Hab: North Queensland (Gordonvale, near Cairns).
Described from one Q caught by sweeping in forest, 3rd
January, 1914 (A. P. Dodd).
Type: In the South Australian Museum, a 2 on a
tag, the antennze and forewings on a slide.
BY ALAN P. DODD. P|
Subfamily Telenomine.
Genus PARATELENOMUS. new genus.
Q Agreeing with the description of Dissolews Ash-
mead but the occiput of the head is distinctly concave ;
the scutum is distinctly wider than long: the parapsidal
furrows are complete, and distinct: and the abdomen
is broadly oval, scarcely as long as the head and thorax
united,.only slightly longer than wide, the 2nd segment
much wider than long. Like Telenomus Haliday but
differing in bearing complete parapsidal furrows.
Type: TELENOMUS BICOLOR, Dodd.
Ent. News, Philadelphia, U.S.A., Vol XXV, June,
1914, pp. 251-2.
Genus PHANUROMYIA, new genus.
Q Like Telenomus Haliday but the ovipositor and
its valves exserted for a length equal to that of the abdomen.
I have not previously seen, nor have I come across
record of, any Scelionid with a truly exserted ovipositor,
that is with the valves exserted, and thus, I think that
character alone all sufficient to form a quite distinct new
genus.
Type: the following species.
PHARUNOMYIA RUFOBASALIS, Sp. nov.
Q Length, 0.95 mm.
Black ; legs (including cox) and antennal scape
golden yellow; pedicel and funicle suffused yellowish ;
first abdominal segment bright reddish.
Head transverse, no wider than the thorax, dorsal
aspect, its cephalic margin convex, the occiput concave ;
eyes rather large; ocelli wide apart, small, the lateral
ones situated against the eye margins. Thorax no longer
than wide ; scutum large, without furrows ; postscutellum
faintly emargined at meson; metanotum very short, its
caudo-lateral . angles sub-acute. Abdomen distinctly
narrower than the thorax; one-half longer than wide ;
J
123 AUSTRALIAN PROCTOTRYPOIDEA.
lst segment short, striate ; 2nd occupying almost all sur-
face, striate at base, smooth for the rest: the abdomen
squarely truncate at apex. Forewings reaching a little
beyond apex of wing; moderately broad; hyaline ; mar-
ginal cilia not long; discal cilia fine and dense ; submar-
ginal vein attaining costa somewhat before middle of wing ;
marginal vein one-half as long as the stigmal, which is not
long, rather oblique; postmarginal about twice as long
as the stigmal. Antenne 11-jointed ; scape rather short,
as long as next three joints combined ; pedicel one-half
longer than wide; first funicle joint about subequal to
pedicel ; 2nd quadrate; 3rd and 4th distinctly narrower
than preceding, transverse; club 5-jointed, joints 1-4
distinctly wider than long; Ist small, 2nd slightly the lar-
gest.
Hab: South Queensland (Childers). Deseribed from
one female caught by sweeping in forest, 2nd July, 1914
(A:«P. Dodd).
Type: In the South Australian Museum, a Q on a
slide.
Genus TELENOMUS, Haliday.
TELENOMUS CCLEOIDES, sp. nov.
Q Length, 1.15 mm.
Very similar to q@cleus Dodd but smaller ; pedicel
not twice as long as wide, the first funicle joint a little
shorter and narrower than pedicel, the 2nd wider than long ;
the club joints shorter, all distinctly wider than long.
Compared with e@cleus.
Hab: North-~ Queensland (Halifax, Herbert River).
Described from one female caught by sweeping miscel-
laneous vegetation, 20th March, 1914 (A. P. Dodd).
Type: In the South Australian Museum, a Q on a
tag, the antennz and forewings on a slide.
TELENOMUS OBLITERATUS, sp. nov.
Q Length, 1.20 mm.
Like qa@cleus but smaller; femora also black; striz
on 2nd abdominal segment so feeble as to be hardly discer-
nible ; only first five antennal joints yellow, the pedicel
BY ALAN P. DODD. Ves:
only one-half longer than wide, first funicle joint as long
and as wide as pedicel, the 2nd a little longer than wide,
club joints all distinctly wider than long ; abdomen shaped
as in wcleus but the 2nd segment shorter, the following
more than half its length.
Hab: North Queensland (Gordonvale, near Cairns).
Described from one female caught by sweeping in jungle,
26th March, 1914 (A, A. Girault).
Type: In the South Australian Museum, a Q on a
tag, the antennz and forewings on a slide.
TELENOMUS EUANDER, Dodd.
One female sweeping in forest, Burnett Heads, Bunda-
berg, S.Q., 20th June, 1914 (A. P. Dodd); also several
females sweeping in forest, Pentland, 200 miles west of
Townsville, N.Q., September, 1914 (A. A. Girault).
TELENOMUS DIEMENENSIS, sp. nov.
Q Length, 1.70 mm.
Coal black : the tibize and tarsi reddish yellow.
Head very transverse, wider than the thorax ; ocelli
large, the lateral ones touching the eye margims. Thorax
a little longer than wide. Abdomen a little longer and wider
than the thorax, the second segment occunying nearly two-
thirds of surface. Head, scutum and scutellum finely
rugulose and pubescent ; Ist and basal two-thirds of 2nd
abdominal segment, striate, the rest smooth, the remaining
segments with setigerous pin-punctures Forewings long
and broad ; infuscated, this deepest around knob of stigmal
vein ; base of wing, and caudal and disto-caudal margins
almost hyaline; discal cilia fine, very dense; venation
fuscous ; submarginal vein attaining the costa about
middle of wing ; marginal vein one-fourth as long as the
stigmal, which is very long, oblique, with a distinct knob;
postmarginal twice as long as the stigmal. Scape long;
pedicel nearly twice as long as greatest width ; first funicle
joint very long, nearly twice as long as pedicel, over one-
half as long as the scape, and as long as three following
joints united ; 2nd a little longer than wide ; 3rd quadrate.
club 6-jointed, joints 1-5 distinctly wider than long, 2nd
the longest and widest.
124 AUSTRALIAN PROCTOTRYPOIDEA.
Hab: Tasmania (Hobart). Described from three
females received from Mr. W. W. Froggatt, and labelled
““ Hobart, A. M. Lea.”’
Type: In the South Australian Museum, a 9 on a
tag, the antenne and forewings on a slide.
Cotypes: In the collection of Mr. W. W. Froggatt,
Government Entomologist, Sydney, two Qs on a tag.
TELENOMUS ®GEUS, sp. nov.
Q Length, 1.00 mm.
Shining black ; legs (except cephalic coxze) golden yellow
also the antennal scape, the next six antennal joints yellow
suffused dusky.
Head viewed from above, not twice as wide as long,
the vertex and frons a little convex, a little wider than the
thorax : with fine polygonal scaly sculpture. Thorax
scarcely longer than wide, the scutum with the same scaly
sculpture and also with fine setigerous pin-punctures, the
scutellum practically smooth and glabrous. Abdomen
as long as the head and thorax united ; as wide as the
thorax ; twice as long as wide; almost pointed at apex ;
lst segment short, striate, the 2nd occupying one-half of
surface, faintly striate at base, then with fine, scaly sculpt-
ure, its apical margin smooth ; remaining segments with
fine pin-punctures. Scape as long as next four joints
combined ; pedicel one-half longer than wide; funicle
joints a little narrower than pedicel, first one-half longer
than wide; 2nd barely longer than wide; 3rd. quadrate ;
4th transverse ; club 5-jointed, first joint very small, the 2nd
abruptly larger, 1-4 transverse, the 3rd slightly the largest.
Forewings reaching apex of abdomen; not very broad ;
hyaline ; discal cilia fine and dense ; submarginal vein
attaining costa about middle of wing ; marginal vein one-
third as long as the stigmal, which is moderately long and
oblique ; postmarginal over twice the length of the stigmal ;
venation indistinct.
Hab: North Queensland (Gordonvale, near Cairns),
Described from one female caught by sweeping in jungle,
30th July, 1914 (A. P. Dodd).
Lype : In the Scuth Australian Museum, a Q on a
slide. y
BY ALAN P. DODD. 125
TELENOMUS AJAX, sp. nov.
Q Length, 0.90 mm.
Similar to @geus but the head, viewed from above,
is distinctly more than twice as wide as long, the vertex
and frons not convex; the thorax distinctly wider than
the abdomen ; the 2nd segment with the polygonal sculpture
not so distinct, the segment almost wholly finely striate,
and occupying over two-thirds of the surface, the remaining
segments smooth, without punctures; antennze more
yellow, the 2nd club joint brownish, the first funicle joint
scarcely longer than wide, the second wider than long.
Hab: North Queensland (Gordonvale, near Cairns).
Described from one female captured with the preceding
species.
Type: In the South Australian Museum, a 9 on a
slide.
Subfamily Bein.
Genus CERATOBXOIDES, Dodd.
The type and second species of this genus, have been
re-examined finding the following additional generic charac-
ters :—Postscutellum with a long, erect. spine; head
viewed from in front, triangular, distinctly longer (dorso-
ventrad) than greatest width.
CERATOBHOIDES SPINOSUS, Sp. nov.
Q Length, 1.60 mm.
Golden yellow; eyes, ocelli, a square patch against
cephalic margin of scutum mesad and adjacent border
of occiput, and horn on basal abdominal segment, black ;
apical club joints dusky black.
Head viewed from above, transverse, somewhat wider
than the thorax ; the latter as wide as long ; head and thorax
finely densely reticulate and pubescent. Parapsidal
furrows present on posterior half of scutum. Abdomen some-
what longer than head and thorax united ; Ist segment
as wide as long, with a blunt horn ; 3rd a little longer than
2nd, the remaining segments’ very short; Ist and 2nd
segments striate, the 3rd finely densely granulate. Fore-
126 AUSTRALIAN PROCTOTRYPOIDEA.
wings long and broad; almost hyaline, with a dark spot
round the marginal vein; discal cilia moderately fine, |
very dense ; marginal vein barely one-half as long as the
stigmal, which is long, rather oblique, straight ; venation
yellowish. Scape long and slender; pedicel over twice
as long as wide : funicle joints narrower than the pedicel,
Ist almost twice as long as wide, 2-4 somewhat wider than
long: club slender. over twice as long as wide, 4-jointed,
divided obliquely.
Hab: South Queensland (Childers). Described from
one female caught by sweeping in forest, 2nd July, 1914
(A. P. Dodd).
Type: In the South Australian Museum, a Q on a
tag, antenneze and forewings on a slide.
Genus CERATOBXUS, Ashmead.
CERATOBHUS FLAVIVENTRIS, sp. nov.
Q Length, 1.15 mm.
Head, thorax and horn on abdomen, black ; abdomen,
legs, and antenne, bright golden yellow.
Antenne 7-jointed ; scape as long as next four joints
combined ; pedicel over twice as long as wide: funicle
joints narrower than the pedicel, lst twice as long as wide,
2-4 wider than long: club as long as the scape. Forewings
almost reaching apex of abdomen: hyaline; moderately
broad ; venation very pale, indistinct ; marginal vein one-
half as long as the stigmal, which is rather long, almost
perpendicular ; basal vein perpendicular, indistinct. Head
transverse, a little wider than the thorax, the latter quadrate,
both finely densely granulate. Abdomen distinctly longer
than the head and thorax combined ;: somewhat narrower
than the thorax: pointed at apex; first two segments
striate, the remaining segments finely polygonally scaly ;
horn on basal segment reaching apex of scutellum; 3rd
segment occupying over one-third of surface, as long as wide.
Hab: North Queensland (Gordonvale, near Cairns).
Described from one female caught by sweeping in forest,
14th August, 1914 (A. A. Girault).
Type: In the South Australian Museum, a Q on a
slide.
ho
~I
BY ALAN P. DODD. ]
Genus Acouus, Ferster.
ACOLUS BIDENTATUS, sp. nov..
Q Length, 1.75 mm.
Black ; abdomen dark brown: coxe black: rest of
legs and the antenne golden yellow, slightly suffused
dusky.
Head, viewed from above, transverse, distinctly wider
than the thorax ; the frons convex : viewed from in front,
much wider than long; eyes large, pubescent ; ocelli very
wide apart. the lateral ones touching the eye margins.
Thorax somewhat longer than wide, the scutum and scutel-
lum large ; posterior angles of the metanotum, acute ;
postscutellum with two short teeth mesad. Abdomen as
long as the head and thorax united, no wider than the head ;
broadly rounded behind; Ist and 2nd segments striate,
the 3rd and 4th finely, densely, irregularly transversely
rugulose ; the 3rd occupying one-half of surface. Head,
scutum and scutellum, finely densely punctate. Fore-
wings just reaching apex of abdomen: moderately broad ;
hyaline ; discal cilia fine, very dense: venation dark and
distinct : submarginal vein attaining the costa at fully
one-half wing length ; marginal vein not one-third as long
as the stigmal, which is moderately long, wholly gently
convexly curved, the convexity proximad ; basal vein not
indicated. Antenne 7-jointed; scape long and slender ;
pedicel one-half longer than wide ; funicle joints narrower
than the pedicel, Ist a little longer than wide, 2-4 very
transverse ; club large, one-half longer than wide.
Hab: North Queensland (Pentland. 200 miles west
of Townsville). | Descrited from one female caught by
sweeping in forest, 8th January, 1913 (A. A. Girault).
Type: In the South Australian Museum, a 2 on a
tag, the antenne and forewings on a slide.
Subfamily Teleasine.
Genus HopLoGRYON. Ashmead.
HoOPLOGRYON NIGRIVENTRIS, sp. nov.
g Length, 1.90 mm.
Black : scutum (except a large square patch mesad
and cephalad, reaching almost to posterior margin), post-
128 AUSTRALIAN PROCTOTRYPOIDEA.
scutellum, and extreme sides of scutellum, bright red-
brown ; antennal scape, pedicel and the legs, golden yellow,
the coxz, apex of femora, apical third of the tibiz, and the
tarsi, dusky.
Head transverse, no wider than the thorax ; ocelli
close together, in an equilateral triangle: face striate,
the strie converging towards the mouth: the vertex also
longitudinally striate. Thorax somewhat longer than wide ;
scutum and scutellum reticulately rugulose; spine on
postscutellum, large. blunt : caudo-lateral angles of metano-
tum acute. Abdomen about as long as the head and thorax
united ; Ist segment longer than wide ; 1st and 2nd segments
striate. the 3rd (except laterad and distad) finely longitu-
dinally rugulose: rest of abdomen smooth, except for
scattered pin-punctures, these dense at cephalic margin
of segments 4-6 where the surface is also finely granulate ;
venter of Ist and 2nd segments striate, remaining segments
with scattered setigerous pin punctures. Forewings reach-
ing beyond apex of abdomen ; broad, the apex truncately
rounded ; infuscated; discal cilia rather coarse, very
dense : marginal vein much shorter than the submarginal ;
the stigmal vein long for the genus and with a distinct
knob. a fourth as long as the marginal ; basal vein indicated ;
venation fuscous. Antenne not much longer than the
body : Ist funicle joint longest of funicle, slightly longer
than 2nd, the latter slightly longer than 3rd ; 3-9 subequal,
the 10th as long as Ist ; pedicel very short.
Hab: New South Wales (Upper Tweed River). De-
scribed from one male caught by sweeping foliage of jungle
plants, 1.000 feet, 17th May, 1914 (A. P. Dodd).
Type: In the South Australian Museum, a ¢ on a tag,
the antenn and forewings on a slide.
Genus PENTACANTHA, Ashmead.
PENTACANTHA NIGRINOTUM, sp. nov.
Q Length, 1.45 mm.
Black ; thorax (except scutum and scutellum), and
first abdominal segment (except its horn) reddish brown ;
legs (including the coxe) golden yellow ; antennz wholly
black.
BY ALAN P. DODD. 129
Head transverse, a little wider than the thorax. Thorax
somewhat longer than wide. Head, scutum and scutellum
pubescent, and with raised reticulation. Spines on post-
scutellum and metanotum, short. Abdomen no_ longer
than the head and thorax united; no wider than the
thorax ; lst segment as long as wide, with a blunt distinct
horn ; 3rd segment occupying nearly one-half of surface ;
Ist and most of 2nd segments striate, the rest smooth.
Forewings reaching apex of abdomen ; moderately broad ;
somewhat infuscated ; discal cilia fine, very dense ; vena-
tion fuscous, the stigmal vein almost perpendicular and
with a slight knob. Pedicel one-half longer than wide,
subequal to 2nd funicle joint, the Ist a little longer, 3rd
and 4th very transverse ; club 6-jointed, joints 1-5 of almost
equal length, 2nd slightly the widest.
Hab: North Queensland (Halifax, Herbert River),
Described from one female caught on foliage of plants
around canefields, 30th March, 1914 (A. P. Dodd).
Type: In the South Australian Museum, a Q on a
tag, the antenne and forewings on a slide.
Genus Trimorus, Ferster.
TRIMORUS NIGRELLUS, Dodd.
Two males taken from foliage of custard-apple in garden,
Townsville, N.Q., 21st April, 1914 (A. P. Dodd).
Family DRYINIDA.
Subfamily Dryinine.
Genus Neopryinus, Perkins.
NEODRYINUS TRILINEATUS, sp. nov.
Q Length, about 5 mm.
Black ; anterior cox (more or less), anterior trochan-
ters, all tarsi (except claw joint on two hind pair of legs),
basal third of posterior tibize, mandibles, and antenne,
clear golden yellow ; anterior tibize brown: head, reddish-
brown, the eyes, ocelli, and a large area occupying centre
of face, black.
130 AUSTRALIAN PROCTOTRYPOIDEA.
Vertex of head, scutum, scutellum, and postscutellum
very finely granulate-rugose, and with silvery white pube-
scence ; face finely longitudinally rugulose-striate ; prono-
tum very finely, subconcentrically rugulose. Parapsidal
furrows very feebly indicated. Metanotum with raised
irregularly longitudinal reticulation and finely densely gran-
ulate. | Abdomen minutely microscopically sculptured, not
shining. Forewings with three smoky bands; base of wing
hyaline ; the Ist band much wider than the 2nd which is
quite narrow and covers apex of basal cells; 3rd band
much broader than the others, commencing at half length of
stigma, its distal margin somewhat convex ; apex of wing
hyaline. Antenne slender, the flagellum gently incrassate,
the Ist funicle joint very long, almost as long as three follow-
ing joints united.
Hab: New South Wales (Chindera, Tweed River).
Described from one female caught by sweeping foliage
and grass in a swamp, 14th May, 1914 (A. P. Dodd).
Type: In the South Australian Museum, a Q on a
tag. This species will be easily distinguished from the
three other Australian species, koebelet Perkins, nelsoni
Perkins, and raptor, Perkins, by the trifasciate wing.
Subfamily Anteonine.
Genus ANTEON, Jurine.
ANTEON PARVULUS, Perkins.
One female sweeping in forest on hills, Maclean,
Clarence River, New South Wales, 27th May, 1914 (A. P.
Dodd).
Family PLATYGASTERIDA.
Genus PLATYGASTOIDES, Dodd.
PLATYGASTOIDES NITIDUS, sp. nov.
@ Length, 2.65 mm.
Black ; the legs concolorous, except proximal third
of the tibize, and tarsi, which are ferruginous, also the
antennal pedicel and first funicle joint.
,
BY ALAN P. DODD. 131
Vertex of head rather thin, the frons twice as wide as
long (cephalic view), the eyes and ocelli large, the latter
rather close together. Head with fine polygonal scaly
sculpture and scattered circular punctures, the latter
more dense toward the mouth. Antenne 10-jointed ;
scape with an enormous leaf like expansion ; pedicel normal,
nearly twice as long as wide; Ist funicle joint very short,
transverse ; 2nd much wider than first and over twice as
long as greatest width ; 3rd and 4th as long as greatest
width, 2-4 dilated at middle: club 4-jointed, joints 1-3
distinctly longer than wide, last as long as previous two
united. Forewings very long, reaching well beyond apex
of abdomen: broad ; darkly infuscated ; discal cilia rather
sparse ; submarginal vein present. Scutum and scutellum
with very fine scaly sculpture ; parapsidal furrows deep,
widening caudad and forming a deep sulcus ; near lateral
margin, a deep groove runs half way from caudal margin
cephalad ; scutellum transverse, with a median carina,
and with a decp sulcus running from centre caudad chagon-
ally to cephalo-laterad angles, the area caudad of this
smooth. Abdomen rather flattened ; as long as the head
and thorax united, fully twice as long as wide ; 2nd segment
occupying nearly one-half of surface ; striate laterad,
the first three segments otherwise smooth, the rest smooth
mesad, then finely rather densely, punctate.
Hab: South Queensland (Childers). Described from
one female caught by sweeping in strip of jungle, 27th
June, 1914 (A. P. Dodd).
Type: In the South Australian Museum, a @ on a
tag, the head and forewings on a slide.
PLATYGASTOIDES NITENS, sp. nov.
@ Length, 2.35 mm.
Very similar to the foregoing but the first funicle joint
though small is longer than wide ; the first three club joints
are wider than long (the last is missing); the parapsidal
furrows, though widening caudad, do not form the wide
sulcus as in nitidus ; and the median carina of the scutellum
is obscure (distinct im nifidus).; tibize almost wholly
132 AUSTRALIAN PROCTOTRYPOIDEA.
black. Metanotum in both species with a distinct median
carina ; also at cephalic ends of parapsidal furrows is a
circular fovea.
Hab : New South Wales (Tweed Heads, Tweed River).
Described from one female caught by sweeping in jungle,
4th May, 1914 (A. P. Dodd).
Type: In the South Australian Museum, a Q on a
tag, the antenne and forewings on a slide.
Family CERAPHRONIDA.
Genus DENDROCERUS, Ratzeburg.
DENDROCERUS VARIEGATUS, Sp. nov.
Q Length, 3.25 mm.
Varnished brown; legs (including coxe), and first
three antennal joints, golden yellow ; rest of antennz brown.
Vertex of head rather flattened ; eyes very large ;
ocelli large, the lateral pair almost touching the eye margins
and each other ; a row of small fovee runs from cephalic
ocellus to posterior margin of the vertex. Thorax over
one-half longer than wide ; finely scaly, and with scattered
punctures ; median groove of scutum deep and distinct ;
scutellum longer than wide. Abdomen slightly longer
than head and thorax united. Forewings long ; moder-
ately broad ; almost hyaline, with a dark blotch beneath
all of stigma and stigmal vein, continued nearly to caudal
margin ; discal cilia moderately fine, dense ; stigma twice
as long as wide ; stigmal vein twice as long as the stigma ;
venation clear honey yellow. Antenne slender ; slightly
widening toward the apex; scape slender ; pedicel thrice
as long as wide ; first funicle joint one-fourth longer than
pedicel ; second a little shorter than pedicel ; 4-8 all dis-
tinctly longer than wide ; last joint as long as the pedicel.
Hab: New South Wales. Described from one female
in the collection of the Macleay Musuem.
Type: Macleay Museum, Sydney ; Hymenoptera, 7D,
a Q ona tag, the antenne and forewings on a slide.
BY ALAN P. DODD. 133
DENDROCERUS VARIIPES, sp. nov:
Q Length, 1.10 mm.
Dark dull brown, the head and scutum lighter ; eves
and ocelli, black ; legs (including the coxe), pale silvery
yellow, the posterior femora, and apical third of posterior
tibiz black; pedicel and first three funicle joints silvery
white, contrasting with the fuscous remaining antennal
joints.
Head somewhat wider than the thorax ; transverse.
Thorax over one-half longer than wide; densely finely
granulate, except the metanotum, which is smooth and
shining ; scutum with a median groove not very distinct :
scutellum longer than wide, convex. Abdomen conic-
ovate ; pointed at apex; no longer or wider than the
thorax ; convex above and beneath, almost as high as long.
Forewings reaching apex of abdomen: moderately broad
base and apex hyaline, the rest deeply clouded ; discal
cilia fine, very dense; stigma semicircular, the stigmal
vein scarcely longer and almost straight. Antenne slightly
widest in centre, the joints all longer than wide ; pedicel
one half longer than wide, a little shorter than first funicle
joint which is a little longer than the second or third, the
fourth slightly the longest.
Hab: New South Wales (Upper Tweed River). De-
scribed from one female caught by sweeping in open forest,
1,000 feet, 17th May, 1914 (A. P. Dodd).
Type: In the South Australian Museum, a Q on a
tag, the antennz and forewings on a slide. :
Genus Mucaspitus, Westwood.
MEGASPILUS CONSPICUUS, sp. nov.
Q Length, 2.10 mm.
Black ; legs (including cox), and antennal scape,
pedicel, and first funicle joint more or less, bright golden
yellow.
Head and thorax with circular punctures. not large
or confluent, the punctures absent on a mesal path of
scutellum, this path quite smooth, the propodeum rugulose.
All. punctures setigerous. Thorax longer than wide;
134 AUSTRALIAN PROCTOTRYPOIDEA.
median and parapsidal furrows of scutum, distinct ; secutel-
lum longer than wide: postscutelium produced into a
triangular blunt spine ; posterior angles of the metanotum,
acute. Abdomen as long as the head and thorax united ;
first segment occupying two-thirds of surface, striate for
its basal third, smooth for the rest : the remaining segments
pubescent. Forewings reaching apex of abdomen ; broad ;
somewhat infuscate ; stigma semicircular; stigmal vein
scarcely curved, twice as long as the stigma; venation
fuscous. Scape long and slender: pedicel almost twice
as long as wide : first funicle joint a little longer than pedicel;
second shorter: the remainder slightly and gradually
widening ; 4-8 a little wider than long.
Hab: South Queensland (Burnett Heads, Bundaberg).
Described from two females caught by sweeping in forest,
20th June, 1914 (A. P. Dodd).
Type: In the South Australian Museum, a Q on a
tag, the antenne and forewings on a slide.
MEGASPILUS PUNCTATIVENTRIS, Sp. nov.
Q Length, 1.90 mm.
Coal black; legs and antennal scape, golden yellow,,.
the coxz black.
Head not very transverse ; lenticular, the frons and
vertex gently convex: finely rugulose; eyes very large,
pubescent. Thorax one-half longer than wide; scutum
and scutellum with rather coarse, dense scaly sculpture _
and whitish pubescence ; median and parapsidal furrows _
of scutum distinct ; scutellum longer than wide ; post-
scutellum with a short, stout spine. Abdomen no longer
or wider than the thorax ; pointed at apex ; convex beneath,
straight above, the apex somewhat upturned ; second
segment occupying over two thirds of surface, striate at
its base, then with dense longitudinal rows of rather small
oval punctures. Forewings reaching apex of abdomen ;
broad, the apex squarely rounded ; hyaline; discal cilia
moderately coarse, rather dense, venation pale fuscous,
the stigma pale yellow; stigma semicircular, the stigmal
vein no longer than the stigma. Antenne 11-jointed ;
scape longer than next four joints combined; pedicel
BY ALAN P. DODD. 135
over twice as long as wide ; first funicle joint as long as the
pedicel: 2nd and 3rd wider than long; 4th the widest of
the funicle, rather abruptly larger than the preceding, a
little longer than wide: the others slightly decreasing in
width, all a little longer than wide. Femora (especially
the posterior pair) distinctly swollen.
Hab: New South Wales (Chindera, Tweed River).
Described from one female caught by sweeping foliage
of, mangrove and other bushes, 14th May, 1914 (A. P. Dodd).
Type: In the South Australian Museum, a Q on a
tag, the antennz and forewings on a slide.
A species close to ausiralicus Dodd.
MEGASPILUS FLAVICINCTUS, sp. nov.
Q Length, 2.10 mm. Of stout form.
Golden brown ; the eyes, ocelli, metanotum, and all
centre of abdomen, black ; legs golden yellow, also the first
two antennal joints, the third brownish, the remainder
black.
Head transverse; no wider than the thorax, with
dense thimble punctures, these with rather long whitish
pubescence ; eyes not large, pubescent. Thorax barely
longer than wide, the scutum and scutellum with rather
dense, thimble punctures and long whitish pubescence ;
scutellum no longer than wide: median and parapsidal
furrows of scutum deep and distinct ; postscutellum with
a stout spine; projecting a little over the abdomen ;
metanotum very short at meson. Abdomen a little longer
than the head and thorax united, a little wider than the
thorax: second segment occupying over one-half of
surface, striate at its base, the rest smooth. Forewings
reaching a little short of apex of abdomen: broad, the
apex rather squarely rounded ; somewhat infuscate, this
deepest beneath stigma and stigma! vein ; discal cilia moder-
ately coarse and dense; venation fuscous ; stigma semi-
circular ; stigmal vein scarcely curved, over twice as long
as the stigma. Antennz 11-jointed ; scape as long as next
five joints combined ; pedicel stout, a little longer than
136 AUSTRALIAN PROCTOTRYPOIDBEA.
wide ; first funicle joint as wide as pedicel and longer,
almost twice as long as wide; 2-8 transverse, distinctly
increasing in width, last joint over twice as long as wide,
longer than two preceding joints united.
Hab: Tasmania (Hobart). Described from one female.
received from Mr. W. W. Froggatt and labelled ‘‘ Hobart,
AM |. Lear? ;
Type: In the collections of Mr. W. W. Froggatt,
Government Entomologist of New South Wales, a Q on
a tag, the antennz and forewings on a slide.
Genus Conostiemus, Dahlbom.
CONOSTIGMUS FLAVIBASALIS, Dodd.
Head and thorax black; abdomen sometimes almost
wholly pale, with the caudal half dorsad, dusky. Head
densely finely punctate and pubescent, the thorax with
scattered pubescence and pin-punctures. Abdomen stout,
distinctly convex above and below.
Several females sweeping miscellaneous vegetation,
chiefly jungle, Grafton, Clarence River, New South Wales,
3rd June, 1914 (A. P. Dodd).
CoNOSTIGMUS RUFINOTUM, Dodd.
Head, scutum and scutellum, smooth and shining
except for indefinite punctuation. Eyes occupying whole
side of face, pubescent. First fumicle joint distinctly shorter
and narrower than pedicel.
Two females sweeping forest, sand ridges near coast,
Chindera, Tweed River, New South Wales, 13th May,
1914 (A. P. Dodd).
CONOSTIGMUS CONCOLORIPES, sp. nov.
Q@ Length, 1.80 mm.
Coal black ; the legs and basal antennal joints, fuscous ;
tarsi yellowish.
Head transverse ; somewhat wider than the thorax ;
densely polygonally scaly ; eyes large, pubescent. Thorax
one-half longer than wide ; scutum and scutellum with
BY ALAN P. DODD. Pa
rather coarse dense scaly sculpture: scutellum longer
than wide ; parapsidal and median furrows of scutum dis-
tinct ; metanotum rather long, more or less finely reticu-
lately rugulose, with several irregularly longitudinal car-
ine. Abdomen rather slender, no longer than the head
and thorax united. Head densely pubescent, the thorax
with only scattered pubescence. Forewings rather long ;
broad, the apex squarely rounded : infuscate, this deepest
beneath stigma and stigmal veins; discal cilia rather
fine and dense; venation fuscous: stigma semicircular ;
stigmal vein scarcely curved, twice as long as the stigma.
Antenne slender, only very slightly increasing in width
toward apex; pedicel over twice as long as greatest
width ; first funicle joint somewhat longer; 2nd two-
thirds as long as preceding : 3-8 subequal, all slightly shorter
than 2nd, twice as long as wide, the last joint longer.
Hab: Tasmania (Hobart). Described from one female
received from Mr. W. W. Froggatt and labelled “Hobart,
AM. Lea.™
Type: In the collections of Mr. W. W. Froggatt,
Government Entomologist of New South Wales, a 9 on
a tag, the antenne an.1 forewings on a slide.
CONOSTIGMUS VARICOLOR, sp. nov.
6 Length, 2.45 mm. Of stout form. .
Black ; lateral lobes of scutum and cephalic margin
of median lobe, sides of metanotum and its apex, base of -
abdomen, and the head, reddish brown ; legs and antennal
scape golden yellow, the intermediate coxz and base of
posterior pair, black ; upper third of face black.
Head granulate, and with rather dense setigerous
thimble punctures ; lower half of face finely transversely
rugulose ; transverse, a little wider than the thorax.
Scutum, scutellum and axilla, granulate, and with numer-
ous scattered thimble punctures, these only present on
extreme laterad of the scutellum. Parapsidal and median
furrows of scutum deep and distinct. Thorax one-half
longer than wide ; scutellum as wide as long ; metanotum
finely longitudinally rugulose. Abdomen no longer or wider
than the thorax ; convex beneath, almost straight above ;
K
138 AUSTRALIAN PROCTOTRY POIDEA.
second segment occupying a I'ttle more than half of surface,
striate at its base, then shining and with fine scaly sculpture,
and a few scattered pin-punctures. Anterior and posterior
femora much swollen. Forewings reaching apex of
abdomen ; very broad, truncately rounded at apex ; with
a large dark area beneath stigmal, stigma, and apex of
submarginal veins, and occupying almost all centre of
wing ; base, apex, and margins nearly hyaline; discal
cilia fine, very dense ; stigmal vein scarcely curved, nearly
twice as long as the semicircular stigma ; venation fuscous,
scape swollen: pedicel shorts funicle joints long and
cylindrical, the first longest, nearly thrice as long as its
width at apex. :
Hab: New South Wales (Upper Tweed River).
Described from one male caught by sweeping in open
forest, 1,000 feet, 17th May, 1914 (A. P. Dodd).
Type: In the South Australian Museum, a g on a
tag, the antennz and forewings on a slide.
CONOSTIGMUS UNICOLOR, sp. nov.
Q Length, 2.05 mm.
Black ; tibiz (except posterior pair), and all tarsi,
golden yellow: femora and posterior tibiz, fuscous ;
antenne scape suffused red.
Head, viewed from above, much wider than long,
the vertex not thin; densely scaly, this not very fine ;
eyes occupying whole side of head, pubescent. Thorax
one-half longer than wide; scutum and scutellum with —
scattered pubescence, and polygonal scaly sculpture, this
latter very fine except around margins of scutellurn where
it is distinctly coarse ; scutellum longer than wide ; metano-
tum very short ; median and parapsidal furrows of scutum,
deep and distinct. Abdomen pointed conic-ovate ; no
longer than the head and thorax united, no wider than
the thorax; straight above, convex beneath; second
segment occupying barely half of surface, with several
strong and numerous fine striz at its base ; the abdomen
otherwise smooth, except for scattered pubescence on apical
segments. Forewings reaching apex of abdomen ; broad ;
lightly infuscate, this deepest beneath marginal and stigmal
BY ALAN P. DODD. 139
veins ; discal cilia fine and dense ; stigma semicircular ;
stigmal vein about twice length of stigma. Antenne not
much increasing in width toward apex, the joints all dis-
tinctly longer than wide ; first funicle joint as long as
pedicel, about thrice as long as greatest width.
Hab: North Queensland (Pentland, 200 miles west of
Townsville). Described from two females caught by sweep-
ing in forest, September, 1914 (A. A. Girault).
Type: In the Queensland Museum, a Q on a tag,
antennz and forewing on a slide.
Genus LyGocrrus, Ferster.
LYGOCERUS ATERRIMUS, Sp. nov.
Q Length, 1.75 mm.
Coal black, the antenne and cox concolorous :
femora and tibize fuscous, the tarsi yellow.
Head transverse, slightly wider than the thorax ;
eyes large. Thorax somewhat longer than wide, almost
squarely truncate anteriorly; median and_ parapsidal
furrows of scutum, distinct ; scutellum longer than wide :
head, scutum, and scutellum with dense scaly sculpture.
Abdomen as long as the head and thorax united ; no wider
than the thorax; almost straight above, convex beneath,
its apex upturned ; smooth, except for strize at its base,
the second segment occupying slightly over one-half of
surface. Forewings reaching apex of abdomen; broad ;
somewhat infuscate, this deepest beneath stigma and
stigmal vein; discal cilia dense, rather fine; stigma
‘semicircular ; stigmal vein almost twice as long as stigma ;
venation fuscous. Antenne 11l-jointed; filiform, not at
all widening ; scape somewhat thickened, as long as next
three joints combined ; pedicel two and a-half times long
as wide ; first funicle joint subequal to the pedicel ; remain-
ing joints shorter, all longer than wide ; the last joint as
long as the pedicel.
Hab: New South Wales (Maclean, Clarence River).
Described from one female caught by sweeping forest
on hills, 30th May, 1914 (A. P. Dodd).
Type: In the South Australian Museum, a Q on a
tag, the antenne and forewings on a slide.
140 AUSTRALIAN PROCTOTRYPOIDEA.
LYGOCERUS ORNATUS, sp. nov.
6 Length, 1.70 mm.
Coal black; legs (except the black coxz) fuscous,
the knees and tarsi yellow, the antenne, scape and pedicel
suffused red.
Head lenticular: viewed from above, transverse,
somewhat wider than the thorax: eyes larg2, pubescent.
Thorax one-half longer than wide ; parapsidal and median
furrows of scutum distinct ; scutellum longer than wide.
Head, scutum, and scutellum with rather coarse, dense
scaly sculpture and rather sparse pubescence. Abdomen
somewhat shorter and narrower than the thorax ; convex
beneath, straight above, its apex distinctly upturned ;
second segment occupying nearly three-fourths of surface,
striate at its base, then smooth, the apical third with rather
dense, fine punctures ; remaining segments with scattered
fine punctures and pubescence. Forewings attaining apex
of abdomen, very broad; hyaline; discal cilia not very
fine, rather dense; stigma large, the stigmal vein only
slightly longer ; venation fuscous, the stigmal vein pale.
Antenne ramose, the first five funicle joints each bearing
a very long slender branch, that on the third slightly the
longest ; scape rather stout ; pedicel stout; first funicle
joint a little longer than pedicel, a little longer than wide ;
2-6 lengthening, the 5th over twice length of lst, the 6th
one half longer than 5th; 7th slightly more than half
length of 6th.
Hab: North Queensland (Harvey’s Creek, near Cairns) -
Described from one male caught on foliage of plants in
jungle country, 12th October, 1914 (A. P. Dodd).
Type: In the South Australian Museum, a g on a-
tag, the antenne and forewings on a slide.
GHOLOGY AND PETROLOGY OF THE ENOGGERA
GRANITE AND THE ALLIED INTRUSIVES.
By W. H. BRYAN, B.Sc.
Research Student, Department of Geology, The
University of Queensland.
Part I.—GENERAL GEOLOGY.
(Puates XI.-XIT.)
(Read before the Royal Society of Queensland, November 30th,
1914.)
1. Introductory ae ae ae as se ape ALL
ii. General and Historical .. ae os Ss sa pha?
iii. Physiography aye ay aes =e -. 143
iv. Rocks of the ieee Socal! . Ay ne woe wD
vy. The Granites—Location, ete. .. ae ae wee aT
Petrology : - ay -. 148
Intrusions in the Cate a be aE
Contact phenomena ar “2 ae Lom
Mode of intrusion ae 2 ao Lae
Age of the Granites “s 3: “hg Ot
vi. The Rhyolitic Intrusives es 3 De so Ds
vii. The Porphyries Ee we sje ae Sg Gi
i.—INTRODUCTORY.
Tue following paper aims at a general description of
the so-called ** Enoggera Granite ’’ and the intrusive rocks
lying to the immediate west of the city of Brisbane. The
relation of these to the other rocks of the area is pointed
out, and a suggestion made as to the probable age of the
igneous injections; while the phenomena accompanying
such injections are discussed, and the nature of the con-
trolling forces indicated.
142 ENOGGERA GRANITE AND ALLIED INTRUSIVES.
Further, the writer endeavours to correlate the granites
and other igneous rocks under consideration with those
of the New England district of New South Wales, and the
Stanthorpe district of Queensland, by means of frequent
comparisons. Unfortunately, here the important work
of correlation must end since the granites of Queensland—
with the sole exception of those of the Stanthorpe area —
have received only very meagre attention at the hands of
geologists.
In addition to the above, a short description of the
physiographical and topographical features of the area
is given, and their relation to the igneous rocks
demonstrated. This phase of the work is illustrated by
a sketch map, showing the chief elements in the topography
of the district.
li.—GENERAL AND HISTORICAL.
The rocks to be described occur principally in the
parishes of Enoggera and Indooroopilly. The area lies
to the west of Brisbane, between Kedron Brook on the north,
and a line from the mouth of Moggill Creek to Corinda
railway station on the south, while to the west it is bounded
by Moggili Creek, the Enoggera Reservoir and Cedar Creek.
The earliest reference to the geology of this area which
the writer has been able to discover was in the year 1887, when
in his ‘‘ Report to Accompany a Geological Map of the City
of Brisbane and its Environs ’’!, Mr. W. H. Rands referred
to a ‘‘* boss’ of granite intruded into the schists to the west
of Brisbane.”’ ‘“‘ It is,” he continued, ‘“* but a smal! patch
about three miles in diameter, extending west as far as the -
Enoggera Reservoir.” In his map, Mr. Rands shows a
portion of the main outcrop of the Enoggera granite, and
also several dykes crossing the track along Taylor Range,
In 1897 Mr. R. L. Jack, at that time Government Geologist,
reported having passed over granite “‘from the middle
of selection 166 to the western boundary of 682 (Enoggera) ”’?
when on a visit to the Enoggera Goldfield. Two years
1. Qld. Geol. Survey, Pub. 34.
2. Annual Progress Report Qld. Geol. Survey, 1897.
BY W. H. BRYAN, B.SC. 143
later—in 1899—the Geological Survey of Queensland
published a map of the “Ipswich Beds. showing their
junction with the Gympie Beds along the Brisbane River.’’4
This map accompanied a report on the Ipswich Coal Field
by Walter E. Cameron, B.A., and included in its scope the
area under discussion.
iil.— PHYSIOGRAPHY.
The chief physiographical and topographical features of
the area are shown in the accompanying sketch-map
(Plate XII.). The dominating elements are two ranges
ot hills roughly about seven hundred feet in height which
rise abruptly out of the surrounding foot-hills. These are
known as Taylor Range and Enoggera Range.
Taylor Range, starting from Mt. Cootha (746ft.), runs
in a direction N. 60° W., through Mt. Constitution (844ft.)
—the highest point of the range—towards the Enoggera
Reservoir. At Mirror Point, in the north-western corner
of Mt. Cootha Reserve, it bifurcates, one branch swinging
round to the north-east towards the Enoggera Range,
from which it is separated by a very marked depression—
known locally as The Gap—through which flows Enoggera
Creek. The other arm, which is a considerably more
important divide, sweeps round to the south of the Enoggera
Reservoir until it runs almost due east and west, when it
becomes a spur of the D’Aguilar Range. It thus forms the
divide between the waters of Moggill Creek on the south
and those of Enoggera Creek on the north.
The Enoggera Range, which lies to the north of Taylor
Range, forms an open curve concave to the east, with its
highest point Mt. Enoggera (1,000ft.) near the middle of
the curve. This range, too, is connected to the D’ Aguilar
Range by a long ridge, which, in this case, has a west-north-
west direction, and passes to the north of the Enoggera
Reservoir, thus forming the divide between Cedar Creek
(which is a tributary of Kedron Brook) and Enoggera Creek.
This latter creek flows then betweeen two almost parallel
spurs, and it is just above the point where these begin to
1. W. E. Cameron, Qld. Geol. Survey, Pub. 147.
144 ENOGGERA GRANITE AND ALLIED INTRUSIVES.
diverge that the Enoggera Reservoir is constructed. From
both Taylor Range and Enoggera Range spurs are sent
out to the east, north-east, and south-east, but these soon
merge into rounded and semi-isolated hills. Further away
to the east. north and south these in their turn gradually
fade into gently-undulating country. This topographical
sequence from steep ridges to rounded spurs and foot-hills, to
undulating plain can easily be interpreted in terms of the
varying resistance to erosion of the different rock
formations met with. The granites, and the schists
where they have been reinforced by intrusions, weather
into steep ridges which, though occasionally _ precipit-
ous, generally present rather rounded profiles. This
description applies equally well to both these rock types
since their modes of weathering are so similar that, from
a consideration of topography alone, it would be well nigh
impossible to tell, when looking from a distance on, say,
Taylor Range, where the granite ended and the schist began.
The schists. on the other hand, which have not been
strengthened by intrusions are shaped by erosion into semi-
detached rounded hills.
The undulating plains which—though they do not occur
within the area mapped—succeed these hills of schists, are
the result of weathering of the Trias-Jura sediments.
The Tertiary gravels where met with form sub-horizontal
outcrops, while the recent alluviums are found as typical
river flood-plains.
These different modes of weathering are reflected in
the courses of such streams as Cubberla Creek, which,
rising in a miniature gorge in the heart of the Taylor Range,
flows rapidly through its narrow channels into the foot-hills,
among which it winds its way in a more leisurely manner,
coming at last to the recent alluvium, through which it
wanders in typical meandrine fashion before it finally
flows sluggishly into the Brisbane River. Another, and
perhaps better, example is instanced in Ithaca Creek.
The question has been raised as to whether the Taylor
and Enoggera Ranges are to be explained as residuals, or
as the result of faulting. Cameron has suggested that
1. W. E. Cameron, Ov. Cit. v. 3.
BY W. H. BRYAN, B.SC. 145
the Brisbane River—or. rather that part of it above Oxley
Creek—which follows approximately the line of junction
between the Brisbane schists and the Ipswich measures,
really marks a series of fault-lines. A number of facts
seem at first rather to support such an idea ; for example,
the abrupt,way in which the ranges rise out of the surround-
ing country and the fairly level summits of these ranges-
The writer, however, has found several objections to such
an hypothesis, and believes that the various phenomena
can be better explained as the result of differential erosion.
At a point on the right bank of the Brisbane River
near Corinda, a section can be seen well exposed at low-
water showing the Trias-Jura beds resting unconformably
on the Brisbane schist, and moreover, this section lies in
the line of supposed faulting. The very gentle dips of the
Ipswich beds in close proximity to the supposed lines of
faulting seem also to militate against such an idea, at least
for the area under discussion. The chief points in favour
of the hypothesis that Taylor Range and Enoggera Range
are residuals resulting from differential erosion are, first,
the fact that these Ranges are composed of very resistant
rocks—the granites, and schists strengthened by large
intrusions—and second, the marked parallelism of the strike
of the intrusives and the axis of granitic intrusion with the
directions of the ranges and chief spurs. In this connection
it is interesting to compare the Geological Map (Plate X1I.),
with that of the Physiographical features (Plate XII.)
iv.—THE RocKS OF THE AREA.—GENERAL.
In the geological formations of the area, rocks of both
igneous, sedimentary and metamorphic origin occur. The
first are represented (1) by rocks of a granitic type—the
Enoggera granites; (2) by intrusive bodies—mostly of a
rhyolitic facies, but in part made up of a more truly
hypabyssal type; and (3) by flows and sills of a basaltic
nature. It is with the first and second of these classes—
which are probably closely related—that this paper is chiefly
concerned, while such examples of the third class as occur
in the area dealt with are dismissed with this brief notice.
146 ENOGGERA GRANITE AND ALLIED INTRUSIVES.
The oldest unaltered sediments occurring in the vicinity
of these igneous rocks, are the series known as the Ipswich
beds. These, although they are not actually shown on
the geological map accompanying this paper, occur almost
immediately outside it, good sections being shown on the
Brisbane River near the mouth of Oxley Creek and at
Corinda. They are made of sandstones, conglomerates,
and grits, interspersed with layers of shale, while almost
at the base of the series is the extensive deposit of volcanic
ash, known as the Brisbane Tuff. The basal beds of the
system are to be seen in a number of sections in and around
Brisbane resting unconformably on the Brisbane schists.
They contain a rich fossil flora of mesozoic forms, a
consideration of which indicates a Trias-Jura age for the
formation.
Above the mesozoic sediments are a series of con-
glomerates, grits and clays. These beds, in which a number
of fossils of dicotyledonous plants have been found, are well
displayed around Sherwood, and are generally assigned to
the Tertiary period.
The most recent deposits are river alluvials which
are to be seen at a number of points along the banks of
the Brisbane River and Kedron Brook, and to a less
extent those of Enoggera and Cubberla Creeks.
The metamorphic rocks are represented by a very
extensive series of altered sediments known as the Brisbane
schists. These schists are extremely important in the
present connection, in that it is with them that the igneous
masses here dealt with are almost invariably associated.
They are undoubtedly the oldest rocks in this portion of
Queensland, and occupy the major part of the area under
discussion. The series is made up of mica schists, slates,
and shales, which have undergone a varying amount of
secondary alteration by silicification. They are markedly
schistose, and generally exhibit very noticeable contortion.
Jensen, in speaking of these Brisbane schists, remarks
that they “are so crushed, folded, foliated and faulted
that they must be assigned to the middle zone” in
1. H. I. Jensen, A.A.A.S., 1909 p. 262.
BY W. H. BRYAN, B.SC. 147
Grubenmann’s classification.! Their general strike is north-
west, with a varying dip to the north-east. The age of
the schists has long been a matter for considerable specula-
tion, as even where not highly foliated, they appear to be
entirely unfossiliferous. The series has at different times
been assigned to the following periods :—Pre-Cambrian,?
Cambrian-Devonian,® Silurian,* Devonian® and Permo-
Carboniferous,’ while at present it is classified by the
Queensland Geological Survey as Devonian.’ This
classification is, however, admittedly only provisional,
no conclusive evidence having as yet come to light.
v.—THE GRANITES.
Location, etc.—The rocks considered under this
heading form three distinct outcrops. The largest of these
is roughly oval in plan, and les between Kedron Brook
on the north, Mt. Cootha Reserve on the south, the Enoggera
Reservoir on the west, and the Enoggera Rifle Range on the
east. The longer axis of the oval lies in a direction N. 12° W.
—S. 12° E., and measures four and a quarter miles, while
the shorter axis is about two and three-quarter miles long.
This principal outcrop is spoken of throughout the paper
as “the Enoggera Area.’’ About one and a quarter miles
south of this occurrence, and roughly one and a-half miles
west-north-west of Indooroopilly railway station, lies the
second outcrop. This is sub-circular in shape, with an
average diameter of about 750 yards. ‘This may be
conveniently termed the ** Green Hill Area” since it lies
adjacent to a hill of that name. Lying to the north-north-
east of the Enoggera Area, and distant from it
one half-mile, and one and a-half miles respectively,
are two further outcrops of granitic rock. They are
1. U. Grubenmann, Die Kristallinen Schiefer.
2. R. A. Wearne, A.A.A.S., 1911.
3. H. I. Jensen, Proc. Royal Soc. of Qld. XXIII, p.154.
4. William H. Rands, Op. cit. p. 1.
. Sir A. C. Gregory, Report on Geological Features of S.E. Districts
of Qld., 1879. :
6. Q’land Geological Survey Map.
7. B. Dunstan, Queensland Mineral Index, Geological Survey,
Queensland, Pub. No. 241, p. 144.
or
148 ENOGGERA GRANITE AND ALLIED INTRUSIVES.
separated by recent alluvium merely, and there is
every reason for considering them as parts of one common
mass with its major axis approximately meridional, and
about one and a-quarter miles in length.
If the major axis of the Enoggera Area be continued
to the south, it will be seen to pass through the centre of the
smaller Green Hill outcrop. Thus this direction may be
considered a true axis of igneous intrusion. The Kedron
Brook outcrops are so seldom seen in direct contact with
the intruded schist that only a rough idea can be gained
as to the real shape of the body, but as has been suggested,
it, too, is probably roughly meridional.
Thus we see that, like the great granite batholiths of
New England,! the axis of intrusion of the Enoggera
granites differs from the strike of the older country rock,—
which in both cases is almost certainly the result of folding
in Permo-Carboniferous times—and seems to sympathise
with the trend of the adjacent coast line. Further north,
in Central Queensland, where the coast line takes the same
direction as the prevailing strike of the older rocks, the
granite batholiths too have this direction.2 This suggests
that in Queensland—or at least in Southern Queensland—
the axes of intrusion belong—as in the case of New South
Wales and Victoria?—to those newer trend lines, which
were initiated soon after the Permo-Carboniferous folding,
and which ultimately determined the position of the present
coast line.
Petrology.*—The most marked feature of the granites
of the area is their variability. This is shown minera-
logically, in the nature of the constituent minerals and their
relative proportions, and texturally in the grainsize and
fabric of the rocks. In this peculiarity the granites resemble
very closely the first of the “ Later Granite Types” of
1. T. W. E. David, Pres? Address to Royal Soc. of N.S.W,
1911, p. 36
2.T. W. E. David, Pres. Address to Royal Soc. of N.S.W.
3. T. W. E. David, Pres. Address to Royal Soc. of N.S.W. 1911,
p- 36.
* The Petrology of the igneous rocks of the area will be treated in
greater detail in Part II of this paper.
BY W. H. BRYAN, B.SC. 149
New England, as described by E. C. Andrews.! and the
“Stanthorpe ’’ granite of Saint-Smith.2 However, in the
case under consideration, the various phases can all be
assigned to one of two main types.
Of these types, the one which forms the major
portion of the outcrop of the Enoggera Area is a
rock of a fairly uniform flesh-colour, which is only
relieved by a minority of ferro-magnesian minerals
—these constituents, however, being very variable.
Usually the rock is holocrystalline and porphyritic, with
medium-sized phenocrysts of quartz, pink orthoclase,
white plagioclase and black mica set in a fine-grained
aplitic, flesh-coloured groundmass. Hornblende is some-
times present, but is always subordinate to the biotite.
Occasionally the porphyritic character disappears, and in
its place appears a medium-grained holocrystalline rock,
which in all other respects resembles the normal type.
In this rock the orthoclase is slightly in excess of the
plagioclase, while in the commoner porphyritic phase the
plagioclase phenocrysts are considerably in excess of the
orthoclase. This apparent diversity is however compen-
sated for in the groundmass of the latter type, which is
rich in orthoclase. The accessory minerals usually present
are apatite in considerable amount, magnetite, and zircon.
Pyrites is usually absent. From this short description
the rock is evidently comparable in structure and minera-
logical character with specimens of a granite from Bolivia
which is described by Mr. G. W. Card,* andis a represent-
ative of the great “‘ Acid’ series of New England granites,
and also with the “ typical ‘ Acid’”’ granite described by
him.*
The second type of granitic rock met with in the
Enoggera Area, is usually considerably less acidic than that
just described, it has a much greater proportion of ferro-
magnesian minerals (often in two generations), has
1. New England Geology. Records of Geol. Survey of N.S.W.
Vol VIII. Part 2, pp. 116-117.
2. Geology and Mineral Resources of the Stanthorpe, Ballandean
-and Wallangarra District. Qland. Geol. Survey Pub. No. 243, p. 39.
3. Geol. Survey of N.S.W. Records, Vol. VIII, p. 219.
4. Mineral Resources of N.S.W., No. 14, p. 23.
150 ENOGGERA GRANITE AND ALLIED INTRUSIVES.
hornblende usually in excess of biotite, is lacking in pink
orthoclase, and contains a marked quantity of pyrites.
Like the former type, it varies somewhat both texturally,
and in the proportions of its constituent minerals. For
convenience this phase of the granites may be called the
granodiorite type. This variety usually occurs as segrega-
tions in the former (using the term in its broadest sense),
these segregations varying in size from patches a few square
inches in area to huge masses covering many square yards.
A common size measures about ten feet in diameter. These
segregations do not favour any particular shape, rounded,
angular, and very irregular patches, all being common.
Larger outcrops of this granodiorite type also occur,
one area in the north-western portion of the mass
measuring some acres in extent.
In connection with this natural division of the granites
into these two fairly distinct groups, it is interesting to
quote Saint-Smith on the “Stanthorpe” granite.
‘*Speaking generally,” he writes, “the ‘ Stanthorpe ’
granite is characterised by a markedly pink colour, due to
the abundance of pink orthoclase felspar, which is seen
through the rock. This colouration does not, however,
persist over the whole area examined, for at Wilson’s
Downfall the rock has a preponderance of long, white fel-
spars having a marked orientation. So pronounced is the
difference between these two varied types of the same
rock-mass. Be
The Green Hill Area is composed of rocks of the first
or adamellite type. They are for the most part very acid,
of a pink colour, and consist of phenocrysts of quartz, pink
orthoclase, white plagioclase, biotite, and a very little
hornblende, set ‘n a fine-grained pink aplitic groundmass.
The Kedron Brook Area differs from the one just
described in that it contains rocks which bear a general
resemblance to the granodiorite type of the Enoggera
Area. Th y contain plagioclase in excess of orthoclase,
the pink variety of the latter minera! being entirely absent.
They vary in colour from light to dark grey, but are all
fine-grained porphyritic rocks. Both pyrites and_ pyrr-
hotite occur as accessory minerals.
lL. Op. cit. p. 40.
BY W. H. BRYAN, B.SC. 151.
Intrusions in the Granite-——The majority of the
dykes found penetrating the granitic rocks can _ be
divided into two distinct classes, viz., dark porphyr-
itic rocks, and light coloured aplites. Several ex-
amples of the former type can be seen in the cuttings
along the Waterworks Road. They vary in width from
a few inches to about fifteen feet. A fairly typical example
of this class occurs in the granite quarry off the Waterworks.
Road. Thiseis about nine inches wide, is dense, heavy,
grey in colour, and made up of phenocrysts of a light
brown (altered) plagioclase and sma!l patches of secondary
quartz set in a very fine-grained felsitic groundmass.
Scattered throughout the rock are segregations of pyrites
up to 5 m.m. in diameter. The other dykes of this type
differ chiefly in the proportion of the phenocrysts to the
groundmass, this ratio being very variable. These
intrusions are similar in their general characteristics to those
considerably larger dykes outside the granite to be
described later as the ‘‘ Porphyries.”’
The aplitic dykes are considerably more numerous
than the porphyritic. They generally occur somewhat
near the contact of the granite with the schist, where they
are frequently associated with pegmatites. These latter vary
from rather coarse-grained rocks—with crystals of ortho-
clase, about two inches long—to micropegmatites, whose
typical structures can only be observed with the micro-
scope, and are often found near, and probably connected
with, large masses of quartz. The aplites themselves are,
as a rule, very fine-grained. They vary considerably in
colour—different examples being white, light brown, pink
and red—and are generally almost entirely free from
ferro-magnesian minerals. A rather different type of
rock, but one which probably belongs to the same phase,
is also met with. This occurs well within the granite,
in large irregular masses. It is a little coarser grained
than the typical aplites, and is generally red in colour. It
frequently contains small blebs of quartz as phenocrysts
and abundant black tourmaline arranged in stellate groups
of small acicular crystals. In this and other points this
rock seems to resemble rather closely the aplitic dykes
intrusive into the Acid Granite of New England, as
152 ENOGGERA GRANITE AND ALLIED INTRUSIVES.
described by Leo. A. Cotton.4 Such an intrusive mass
is to be seen on the summit of Mt. Enoggera, which is the
highest point in the area. This particular occurrence
appears to grade into a biscuit-coloured fine grained rock,
containing a noticeable amount of biotite. This phase is
interesting since in it the writer has discovered flakes of
molybdenite arranged along the joint planes. Other
rocks which should be mentioned here are the typical greisen,
which occurs near the Enoggera Reservoir, and in Portion
856, Parish of Enoggera
Considered both as a whole and in detail, this aplitic
phase corresponds closely to the group of intrusives which
followed almost immediately the appearance of the “* Acid ”
and ‘' Stanthorpe ”' granites of New England and Stanthorpe
respectively .2
Contact Phenomena.—A study of the contact phenomena
associated with the intrusion of the granites brings to light
a number of interesting facts. The changes brought about
by such intrusion vary in an apparently arbitrary manner
from place to place, and are often quite local in character.
As the main mass of granite is approached from the east,
the schists, which normally strike in a north-westerly
direction, are seen to gradually change in strike, until, when
near the intrusive mass, they lie roughly parallel to the
adjacent edge of the granite. A similar phenomenon is
observed when the Enoggera granite is approached from
the west, but in this case the dip itself is reversed, the
schists to the west and south-west of the granite dipping
to the west and south-west respectively. Numerous dips
have been observed, and in nearly every case the schist
is seen to lie parallel to the edge of the granite, and to dip
away fromit. For the smaller Green Hill and Kedron Brook
areas this generalisation does not seem to hold, for in each
of these cases the strike of the schist seems to have been only
locally affected by the intrusion of the magma. Indeed,
in the case of the former area, quite a different type of
structural change is brought about. This involved the
1. The Tin Deposits of New England, N.S.W. I. Proc. Linn. Soc. of
N.S.W., 1909, p. 745.
2. Compare the works of Andrews, Carne, Cotton, and Saint-Smith
already cited.
iu
BY W. H. BRYAN, B.SC. 153
brecciation and grinding-up of the schist, and examples
can be seen at a number of points outside the periphery
of this ntrusion. The breccia is made up of angular
fragments o schist of various sizes, but seldom exceeding
one inch in length, set in a finely-powdered ground mass.
This rock, as the granite is approached, gradually shades
off into a hornfels showing traces of the agglomeritic
structure, which in turn is succeeded by a more normal
hornfels.
The mineralogical and textural changes induced in
the schists not only vary in the different areas considered,
but vary at different contacts of the same intrusive mass.
In general, as the granite is approached, the quartz veins,
which form a noticeable feature even in the normal schist,
become more frequent, until in close proximity to the
granite, the whole rock seems to have been silicified and
hardened. A marked textural change is to be seen near
the Enoggera Reservoir where the heat resulting from
the intrusion has converted the normal micaceous schist—
already somewhat siliceous—into a hard black hornfels.
On the north-north-west edge of the main granite area,
and twenty-five yards outside the actual contact, on the
Cedar Creek Road, there is a band of rock about two feet
in thickness, showing the typical schistose and contorted
structure of the Brisbane schists, but made up almost
entirely of tourmaline and felspar arranged in definite bands.
The tourmaline—which is the black variety schorl—is
present as numerous minute acicular crystals all arranged
with their long axes parallel to the planes of schistosity,
and seems to have taken the place of the micaceous part
of the schist ; while the felspar seems to occupy the spaces
previously occupied by the small veins of quartz. The
whole schist has been so beautifully replaced that the new
rock under the closest scrutiny shows every characteristic
of the normal schistose structure. Nearer the granite,
and almost right on the contact itself, is a larger body of
schorl rock composed entirely of tourmaline in the same
slender crystals, but in which the original schistosity is only
faintly recognisable. This rock contains cavities which
are partly filled with well-shaped quartz crystals with
L
154 ENOGGERA GRANITE AND ALLIED INTRUSIVES.
an occasional crystal of pyrites. Small patche: of
tourmaline are also found in the schist over fiftv yards
from the contact.
A noticeable textural change in addition to that from
schist to hornfels already described, and one that is well
developed round the Green Hill Area, is that from the
typically schistose to the typically gneissose. This is well
shown in the creek bed in the south-east corner of portion
310, parish Indooroopilly. Here, when about one hundred
yards from the contact with the Green Hill granite, the
schist takes on a gneissose character. The ferro-magnesian
minerals are gathered together in long, black, well-defined
bands varying from less than one millimetre to over two
centimetres in width. These bands appear under the
microscope as masses of small fresh crystals of biotite,
the rest of the rock being occupied by lenticular streaks
of white quartz, which, when examined by the same means,
is seen to have undergone recrystallisation.
Chemical changes resulting from absorption of the
invaded schists by the granites, or allied phenomena, seem
to be almost entirely wanting. With but one exception,
the contact between the schist and the igneous rock is
very sharp and clearly defined. There seems to be no
evidence to show that assimilation of the invaded for-
mation by the intruding magma has taken place. The
one possible exception is seen in the creek bed in por-
tion 229, parish of Indooroopilly, where between the
granite—which is considerably less acid than normally
at this point—and the hornfels—by which the schist is
here represented—there is a distinct glassy. band of a
yellow colour and measuring half an inch in thickness.
On examination with the microscope this band proves to
be made up of irregular crystals of quartz one-half to three
millimetres in length arranged at right angles to the line
of contact, with—filling the spaces between them—aggregates
of a sericitic mica. The granite in the immediate neigh-
bourhood of this band is considerably darker than the
normal pink type. This is due to the facts that the aplitic
groundmass has almost disappeared and the proportion of
BY W. H. BRYAN, B.SC, 155
primary biotite has considerably increased. The chlorite
resulting from the decomposition of this mineral also tends
to make the rock abnormally dark.
A matter which is closely connected with the phen-
omena of contact metamorphism is the presence of
fragments of the country rock in the invading magma.
Such inclusions though very rare have been found on
the edge of the large Enoggera mass. They are much
more numerous in the Green Hill Area, a good develop-
ment occurring in the creek bed in the south-east
part of portion 310, parish of Indooroopilly. Here
the granite near the actual contact contains numerous
inclusions of schist, or rather of a gneissose rock similar
to the altered schist in the neighbourhood of the contact.
The largest of these fragments measures only about one
foot in length. The edges of these inclusions show a slightly
darker band from 1.5 to 2 millimetres in thickness, other-
wise they are entirely unaltered, preserving a very definite
outline strongly contrasted against the enclosing granite,
and internally in no way different from the adjacent country
rock. The inclusions seem limited to a narrow zone at the
edge of the granite, none having been found in the more
central portions of the mass. In this connection, it is
interesting to note that Daly’s Zone of Apophyses!—that
belt ‘ more remote from the intrusive body” than the
Zone of Inclusions and consisting of ‘* country rock inter-
sected by more or less numerous apophyses from the main
igneous mass ”’ is quite wanting, the contact of granite and
schist even in the neighbourhood of the inclusions being
quite regular.
In considering the various changes outlined above,
there is one fact of observation which is highly interesting.
It is that the phenomena of metamorphism resulting” from
the intrusion of the large mass seem to be more widely spread
but less intense in character than those of the smaller Green
Hill mass. The chief change caused by the larger intrusion
was the alteration in the strike of the intruded rocks and
their general hardening. The more pronounced meta-
1. The Mechanies of Igneous Intrusion (Second paper) Amer. Jrnl. of
Sci.. August, 1905.
156 ENOGGERA GRANITE AND ALLIED INTRUSIVES.
morphism resulting in the formation of gneissose textures,
in brecciation and the tearing off—by whatever means—
of fragments of the wall rock, occurs around the smaller
mass, which however does not seem to have influenced the
strike of the schists to any very noticeable extent.
Mode of Intrusion—Of the three principal theories
at present put forward to account for the intrusion of granitic
magmas, the Marginal Assimilation theory, which is sup-
ported by some French geologists, suggests chemical energy
as the chief factor in the intrusion; the Overhead Stoping
Hypothesis of R. A. Daly+ considers heat energy to be the
all-powerful agent, while the Laccolitic Theory, advanced
by Harker,? Brégger* and many others, relies chiefly on
mechanical energy.
If the above hypotheses be applied to the present
instance, it will be seen that the evidence in general supports
the Laccolitic method of intrusion for at least the large
Enoggera mass, as witness the following facts.
The schists near the contact strike parallel to and dip
away from the granite. Here, obviously, great mechanical
energy must have been called into play, either in the pre-
paration by folding movements of a cavity or plane of
weakness in the schists into which the magma found its
way (forming the “ phacolite’’ of Harker*+) or—and this
seems more probable, since the long axis of the intrusion
is not sympathetic with the strike of the schists—in the
actual lifting up of the schist cover by the invading magma
itself to form the typical laccolite. :
The contacts of schist and granite are always very
sharply defined. Traces of assimilation are quite lacking
and hence the Assimilation Hypothesis seems out of the
question.
There is an almost complete absence of inclusions,
such few as are found showing no trace of absorption by
the magma. Further there is, too, an absence of what Daly
terms the Zone of Apophyses. These facts militate against
1. Mechanics of Igneous Intrusion. Am. Jour. Se., April, 1903.
2. Natural History of Igneous Rocks, p. 82. et seq.
3. Eruptivegesteine des Kristianiagebietes, II, pp. 116-152.
AS Opeacite spsy il
BY W. H. BRYAN, B.SC. V7
the Overhead Stoping Hypothesis, since this postulates a
fracturing of the invaded rock followed by the injection of
long sinuous apophyses of low viscosity into the fractures,
as the essential features of the growth of the intrusion.
The ground-plan is that of a typical laccolite, as are
the proportionate lengths of the major and minor axes,
that is 3:2.4_ While it is impossible from the limited
vertical section exposed to observation to classify this
igneous body strictly according to its shape—as Daly would
have it—these facts taken into conjunction with the probable
method of intrusion seem to point to the shape of this oceur-
rence as that of a true laccolite. Similar laccolites of
Plutonic rock have been described from a number of places,
while Brégger explains much larger areas of granite as lac-
colites.
In the considerably smaller Green Hill Area, the phenom
ena seem to resemble more closely those which one would
expect as the result of “overhead stoping.’”’ The dips
of the schists seem to be almost independent of the granite
mass. Inclusions are fairly common and answer very well
to the description of those found in Daly’s type localities,
but here again the Zone of Apophyses is wanting. Assimi-
lation is present in this area but on such an exceedingly
small scale as to show its practical insignificance to the
problem in hand. Yet even in this area mechanical energy
has played an important part as witness the schist breccia
with its finely-ground base which is so characteristic a
feature of this intrusion.
Age of the Granites—Unfortunately, work done up to
the present can throw very little direct light on the exact age
of the Enoggera granites. They undoubtedly intrude
the Brisbane schists, as the various contact phenomena
plainly show. Further, the included fragments in the
granite are inclusions of schists, not of unaltered sedi-
ments, so that the movements producing the schistosity
occurred before the intrusion of the granite. Again, the
axis of intrusion cuts across the axis of folding, the two
1. G. K. Gilbert, Geology of the Henry Mountains.
2. Mechanics of Igneous Intrusion, p. 272.
3. Alfred Harker Op. cit., pp. 65, 67 and 82.
158 ENOGGERA GRANITE AND ALLIED INTRUSIVES.
directions making an angle of thirty degrees, so that the
latest folding of the schists also antedated the appearance
of the granites.
Unfortunately, the age of the Brisbane schists them-
selves is still in the region of doubt, but there seems
little reason to doubt that they are early Paleozoic sedi-
ments, and that the folding referréd to took place in late
Palwozoic—probably Permo-Carboniferous—times.
Although the granites lé in such close proximity to
the Ipswich beds, neither they, nor any of the ailied, but
somewhat later, intrusives intrude these strata. Since
the Brisbane representatives are the basal members of the
Ipswich series, and since this is the lowest division of
the Trias-Jura, the granites are probably pre Trias-Jura.
These facts, though slight, point to the probability that ,
the granites are late Permo-Carboniferous in age.
lf we now resort to less direct methods and consider
the evidence gained by a correlation of these granites with
those of other areas, a practically indentical result is arrived
at. From a study of the works of Andrews, Carne, and
Cotton on the New England granites, the writer has come
to the conclusion that in spite of superficial differences the
Enoggera granites resemble very closely, and are probably
related to in point of time, the granites which Andrews
considers under his ** Later Granite Types” or ‘* Acid ”
granites which are indentical with the Stanthorpe granites.
The chief grounds for this conclusion are, the general
mineralogical similarity,’ the marked variability of the
rocks of both areas—Andrew’s description? might be applied
word for word to the Enoggera granite—the absolutely sharp
lines of demarcation between the granites and the invaded
rocks,? the association of each of the granites with some-
what later finer-grained aplitic types, lacking in ferro-
magnesian constituents and containing black tourmaline
and molybdenitet and the further association of the granites
with rhyolitic intrusions, quartz porphyries, and porphyries.®
Card Mineral Resources of N.S.W. Records, Vol. VIII, p. 23.
E Opy eit.sp: 1S:
. Andrews, Op. cit. p. 232.
. Andrews, Op. cit. p. 232.
. Andrews, Op. cit. pp. 117, 128
Cre GO bo
EE
BY W. H. BRYAN, B.SC. 159
These later * Acid” granites of New England have
been considered by different observers to be Permo-Carbon-
iferous,!. 2 ~ Early Mesozoic,”® + and Mesozoic? in age.
A consideration of these opinions and especially the more
recent ones seems to point to late Permo-Carboniferous
as being the most probable age of intrusion.
Assuming then that the Enoggera granites and the
‘‘acid’”’ granites are related as regards time of intrusion,
this result gives weight to the decision. already formed on
purely local evidence, that the granites are late Permo-Car-
boniferous, which may then be supposed to approximate
the truth.
vi. THE RHYOLITIC INTRUSIVES.
This is the name given to an extensive series of intrusives
which occurs throughout the area, the great majority of
them however, lying to the south of the main granite
outcrop. The rocks which come under this head vary
considerably, but are as a rule light in colour, the commonest
shades being white, light brown and grey. Thev include
intrusive rhyolites, felsites and fime-gramed granoyhyric
rocks. They are frequently porphyritic—the phenocrysts
generally being orthociase—but in no case is this structure
pronounced. Well marked fluxion structure is very com-
mon, especially in the more acid varieties. A feature which
is characteristic of the group is its mode of weathering.
Almost without exception the rocks weather into very
angular fragments with sharp edges. The planes along
which the rocks break intersect each other at all
angles, the cracks generally being filled with limonite.
In this respect the group is very strongly differentiated
from the yoanger prophyries to be described later. A
common mode of alteration in these intrusives is caused
by the continuous passage of siliceous waters through them.
The rocks thus attacked gradually become more and more
Fedeial Hand-book, B.A.A.S.
Andrews in the Hand-book of N.S.W., issued for B.A.A.S., p
Carne, Op. cit. (on maps).
Andrews, Op. cit. ps. 113.
Carne, Op. cit.
SLC) Boi
160 ENOGGERA GRANITE AND ALLIED INTRUSIVES.
siliceous, until at last they resemble very closely some
quartzites. A good example of such an altered rock is to
be seen in the quarry at Corinda.
As regards mode of occurrence these rocks are found
both as dykes, sills and laccolites. Examples of the first
type are very common, the great majority of the smaller
intrusions being of this nature. Sills, though not so plentiful
have been observed at a number of points throughout the
area, the large intrusion in portion 684, parish Indooroopilly
probably being of this nature.
A good example of the laccolitic type of intrusion is
to be seen on the northern edge of the Mount Cootha Reserve.
This large mass is now considerably dissected by young
streams, but enough remains to show that it is a laccolite-
The level of its base—470 ft. above sea level—is wonder-
fully constant. A small patch of schist still caps the top
of the intrusion which is 590 ft. above sea level, giving a
thickness of 120 feet for the intrusion. As far as can be
determined the laccolite measures about 550 yards in length,
the ratio of height to length being approximately 1 : 14.
Another splendid example of this type of intrusion occurs
at Indooroopilly. Here on the left bank of the Brisbane
River, just below the Albert Bridge, is to be seen an oblique
section across the end of a laccolite. The schists can be
observed dipping away from the intrusion on both sides,
while the jointing of the intrusion itself forms a pronounced
curve with its convexity upwards since it seems to follow the
outline of the intrusion itself. This particular intrusion can
be followed for nearly a mile in a north-westerly direction,
but the outcrop is merely a small portion of the top which
has been exposed by the erosion of the overlying schist.+
At first sight, the rhyolitic intrusions seem to lack
uniformity of direction, but a study of the map, together
with numerous observations in the field, show that there are
two or three directions which are particularly favoured.
These are west-north-west, north-west, and north-north-
west. Those falling under the first and second directions
seem to run more or less in the general direction of the
strike of those schists, and are well illustrated by the large
intrusion at Indooroopilly just discussed. The last direct-
BY W. H. BYRAN, B.SC 161
ion is shown by a series of disconnected dykes, which, break-
ing across the strike of the schists extend from the cross
roads at Indooroopilly school to the carriage drive in Mt.
Cootha Reserve, the line of intrusion in this case being
-almost parallel to the axis of intrusion of the granites.
An interesting feature in connection with these rhyo-
lites is the fact that some of them have been found to be
slightly auriferous. Mr. Rands?} refers to an intrusion—
probably that in the road cutting near Indooroopilly sechoo]—
in which ~ very minute specks of goid were visible.’ An
assay of an average sample, however, ~ gave but a mere
trace of the precious metal.”’
vii. THE PORPHYRIES.
This is a field name given to a series of rocks, which
differ in many respects from the rhyolitic dykes. They
form a distinctive type, and seem to be the result of a rather
later series of intrusions than that which produced the
more acid rocks. The rock is readily recognised in the
field since it always weathers into black, rounded boulders,
somewhat rough and pitted on the outside. It is thus
easily distinguished from the sharp angular fragments
resulting from the weathering of the other more acid type
of intrusion. The typical rock is porphyritie with numerous
phenocrysts of idiomorphic felspar—brown from alteration
—showing zoning in the hand specimen, and a few smaller
phenocrysts of quartz set in a brown cr grey felsitic ground-
mass.
The rock easily undergoes decomposition, making it.
extremely difficult to collect fresh specimens. Under the
microscope, the quartz phenocrysts are seen to have rounded
outlines, to be deeply corroded and to be surrounded by
marked reaction rims. The felspar is very altered being
replaced by an aggregate of muscovite and similar secondary
minerals. In spite of this alteration the idiomorphic
outlines of the original crystals are still definitely preserved.
Both the felspar and quartz phenocrysts are very s milar
?
5 Op. cit. p. ly
162 ENOGGERA GRANITE AND ALLIED INTRUSIVES.
to those observed in a quartz-porphry which outcrops
in the bed of Ithaca creek, and which in most other respects
resembles the rhyolite rocks. It thus seems to form a
connecting link between these two very different types of
rock. : j
A series of intrusions which are very similar to the
porphyries have already been described as intruding the
granite itself. The porphyries seem then to be younger
than the granites, and as they also break through an impor-
tant chain of rhyolitic dykes on the southern boundary
of Mt. Cootha Reserve, they are younger too than this
group of intrusions.
There are two principal outcrops of the porphyry.
One is roughly parallel to Taylor Range, and outciops
near the top of the ridge which it occasionally crosses,
thus probably forming the backbone which has preserved
this part of the range as a residual. The general direction
taken by this intrusion is thus north-west—south-east.
The only other really extensive intrusion of this rock occurs
as a series of outcrops about one mile to the west of the
Green Hill granite. Here the individual outcrops and the
intrusion as a whole seem to strike almost due north, again
sympathising with the long axis of the granites.
—--~— uy
! would like here to express my gratitude to Mr. Rich-
ards and Mr. Walkom of the Department of Geology in the
University of Queensland, for the help and advice which
they were ever ready to offer me in connection with the
preparation of this paper, and their kindly encouragement
throughout the whole of the work.
Proc. Roy. Soc. Q
44972459
£074 747 4
4
Geovosica}
or fT
EI NOGGERA G
"Tae 7
Ver
ep 1Pe ALLUVIUM
[tS cweacr
c° 8] CONGLOMERATES
Be lironenvnice
ree RHYOLITIC DYKES
‘= GRANITES
L__] semis
(PLate XL) >
Proc. Roy. Soo. Q’Lanp, Vow. xxvt.
NOOOROOPILLY
Grovosicat
or me
Enoccena Granite Anca
ZA ascuvue necen
; [oS sass rentiany
CONGLOMEMares, TERTIARY
PLES] ponpnvmes late
REM nwvouric overs & PALaco:
Gnamives zo1e
Scuist 7 onvonian
SEALE OF CHains
Proc, Roy. Sc
SKETCH
CHIEF PHYSIOG
ENoGGERA
SCALE
Proc, Roy. Soo. Q’Lanp, VoL. Xxvi.
Sketcu Map
SHOWING THE
CHIEF PHYSIOGRAPHICAL FEATURES
or THe
Enoccera Granite Apnea
SCALE OF CHAINS
ENOGGER.
RESERVO!
(Puate XII.)
TT 7
100136747
Ta
+>
‘Neo>
ep ul
ya 2en0e4 D201
See (yea >euipeys40
sovimuies +!
aT